Home

R&S FSV-K82/-K83 CDMA2000 Analysis

1. 179 CAL Culate Subsystem erret a sa un kara s cxx aeg Rasa raa nuuc 181 CALCulate FEED Subsystem 2 ineo ee ceu saute egeo bee dea na bee ce ER Ree 182 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Gubevsiem 184 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 191 CONFigure Subsystem cerita ieiunii scire intl oin nnns e 224 CONFigure CDPower Subsystem K82 K84 sss 224 DISPlay SUubDSYSteM c nica rene oo renta ken npa re a de ra anu Ra Dr kem o aea an Ri soir aan ga 235 INSTrument Subsystem 5 uer caca sitiens it di rasan Emu uina 242 SENS SUDSYStOM 243 SENSe CDPower Subsystem esses senten entrent 243 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 252 STATUS s bsystem nino irtere rnei sia darnaus le rock EENNEEER SEENEN 290 TRACe Subsystem innt nni ierra rune eren aac danava Ras van piinaa 291 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Remote Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis px M P n M e M EEN 7 9 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eene 300 TOA INP t comiriands ener da a e aate er Rae RR 300 ENN ee ul ln EE 307 1 9 3 Other Referenced Commands ciae iter tuae hada nana td dr 310 T 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrum
2. 65 86 Online help Working KEE 8 Options FSW B25 ndisse tance tbi podre 82 134 305 RF Preamplifier B22 Overwrite mode crece e eere cree oaa P Peak Code Domain Error E o e aue dee e 46 PEAKSEARGE 2 2 55 iere t ea 89 Ph Noise Auto Peak Search remote Control E Phase Error vs Chip Pilot Power KBI 76 PN Offset KEZ n de 71 polarity external trigger sica 64 85 trigger AA A 64 85 Positive Peak detector ttr 156 power bandwidth percentage sees 120 Power Classes SEM e 118 Power Control Group Bda tna 75 power measurement 100 IA vee 54 jp 108 Power Reference ER den Ere ee etti uvis 76 Power vs PCG A i a a ana 41 Power vs Symbol Bt eaan 50 Ce TE 65 86 Preamplifier B22 sese 63 82 134 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 sss 94 301 R amp S Support tuc M e 96 reference value channel power AA 109 reference level channel power offset Reference level patienda Reference Level Digital le EE 94 Reload Channel Table KRAN 70 remote CALCulate Subsystem K82 sss 181 Resolution bandwidth 5 eee 138 Restore Default Channel Tables p aait 70 Result Display Channel Bitstre
3. ters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all avail able options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is instal led on the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The cur rent release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is dis
4. n Pm o HJ i Pi d f 6 1 3 13 6 1 3 14 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA ABITstream lt 1 4 gt Mag Error vs Chip Mag Error vs Chip activates the Magnitude Error versus chip display The magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the slected PCG The magnitude error is calculated by the difference of the magnitude of received signal and magnitude of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference sig nal and given in percent 128 Chips Chip 1535 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP MAGN see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected PCG The phase error is calculated by the differ ence of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference sig nal is estimated from the channel co
5. O Average detector Average trace mode band Bet c o 101 Bandwidth Med iras iaa 137 FRESOIUTIOMN aria a 138 A nei aan kes 138 base spreading factor A E E E TTE 70 Gh MET 73 Blank lee 159 C Cancel Table Go I 69 Capture Length Co M 64 CODE E 121 K ness aco sU e de V MER 56 Center Trequeri Cy itte ee xe cendres 62 80 127 Rip M 127 CF Stepsize cjp cM 80 channel barndwidtli oo er ii 103 121 tu et 102 SPACING C cose 104 Channel Code Number KG ci idad 75 Channel Bitstream E 50 Channel Constellation GP enee esoe Eege EENEG 47 Channel Search Mode K M 66 Channel Table Settings K NEENA tai 65 Channel Tables A 40 67 Characters Dellt Clear Write trace mode Se Code Domain Analysis rentes Code Domain Error Power CP A A ET 44 Code Domain Overview GG MH MM 7T Code Domain Power K A AEE ENA E E E E 38 Code Order EE 76 Code Power KOZ M 76 Commands IR lee EE 179 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function 121 Composite Constellation A O ET 49 Composite EVM A deed Eddie 45 Continuols EE 84 144 Correction inlierent NOISE orte rm eee 110 136 coupling default settings irren 143 Coupling Resolution bandwid
6. Stepsize Sweep Points remote control SOP M Stop remote control n Stop Frequency remote control SWEEP COUN entere eres Sweep List remote control 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 SWEEPPOIN S rre ct rate Sweep Points remote control m Sweep Time faerit sai irin eee rentas Sweeptime Auto remote control Threshold remote control Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 remote control Trace Mode remote control sisisi Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 285 309 Trg Gate Source remote control 285 308 Trigger Holdoff remote control 308 Trigger Out Low High remote control S Trigger Polarity Blp Unit remote control Video BW Auto remote control Video BW Manual remote control 268 Video Output Ve me Weight ADJ On Off remote control dech Weight TX On Off remote control Weighting Filter remote control X RBW X RBW remote control X Span X Span remote control veh Ee x Axis Range remote control ssss 221 x Axis Ref Level x Axis Ref Level remote control X Demod BW K7 WEE 128 y Axis Max Value y Axis Max Value remote control y Axis M
7. Spreading factor Number of values 64 24 32 48 16 96 8 192 4 384 Channel Constellation The command returns two values the real and imaginary parts for every symbol in the following order re 0 gt lt im 0 gt lt re 1 gt lt im 1 gt lt re n im n The number of value pairs depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor With transmit diversity activated the number of pairs is reduced to the half TRACe Subsystem Spreading factor Number of values 128 12 64 24 32 48 16 96 8 192 4 384 Composite Constellation The command returns two values the real and imaginary parts for every chip in the following order re chip 0 gt lt im chip 0 gt lt re chip 1 gt lt im chip 1 gt The number of value pairs corresponds to the chip number of 1536 chips in a power control group Channel Bitstream The command returns the bitstream of one slot i e it returns one value for every bit either O or 1 in a symbol in the following order bit 1 gt bit 2 gt bit n gt The number of returned bits depends on the symbol rate and therefore the spreading factor of the channel A PCG can contain a minimum of 12 and a maximum of 384 symbols BPSK modulation Spreading factor Number of values 128 12 64 24 32 48 16 96 8 192 4 384 QPSK modulation Spreading
8. Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe State This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before this command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CA
9. Manual operation See Long Code Offset on page 74 SENSe CDPower LCODe MODE Mode This command selects the mode of the long code generation Parameters Mode STANdard The cdma2000 standard long code generator is used ESG101 The Agilent ESG option 101 long code is used in this case only signals from that generator can be analysed RST STANdard Mode CDMA Manual operation See Long Code Gen Mode on page 74 SENSe CDPower NORMalize boolean This command activates or deactivates the elimination of the IQ offset from the signal Parameters ON OFF gt RST OFF Example CDP NORM ON Activates normalization Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower ORDer lt SortOrder gt This command sets the channel sorting for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt SortOrder gt HADamard BITReverse RST HADamard For further details refer to Code Order on page 76 Example CDP ORD HAD Sets Hadamard order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in Hadamard order CDP ORD BITR Sets BitReverse order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Mode CDMA Manual operation See Code Order on page 76 SENSe CDPower OVERview State This command switches to an overview display of a code domain measurement CDP rel CDP abs CDEP If enabled the branch of the code power is displayed in screen A and the Q bran
10. The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 239 Scale Opens a submenu to define the amplitude scaling type This softkey and its submenu is available for code domain measurements in BTS mode K82 Auto Scale Once Scale Automatically scales the y axis of the grid of the selected screen with respect to the measured data The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 238 Y Axis Maximum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the maximum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 241 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Y Axis Minimum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the minimum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected Screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 242 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the meas
11. 74 Long Code Mask K83 remote control 2 eie me tm 246 c 74 Long Code Offset K83 remote control Cp Low pass Filter E 71 Lower Level Hysteresis ej cy E 93 Lower case commands oiiire 180 M Magnitude Error VS Chip crt 52 marker center frequency TO escorias 91 DOAK E OEN 89 Marker menu KEZ n 88 147 Marker To menu KEZ A A on A aca cenaned AEEA 89 Markers Se t ME 148 Max Hold trace mode ssssssseeee 87 158 maximutm Search ies cepere diia 89 Measure Channel Table Gu 69 measurement ACLR CCDF al Code Domain Analyzer sese 100 Crest Factor e eine eee asy ENEE 121 Occupied Bandwidth 2 120 POWER not cec 100 Spectrum Emission Mask za 110 Measurement menu ccccccoccoccccnncnnnoonnnncnnnnnnonononnnnncnnnnnononnos 97 menu cepe 126 re Em 129 WO Prat ee GEES 143 Menu Amplitude cri eroe iren tits Bandwidth Min Hold trace mode minimum search multi carrier KOZ 71 multi carrier filter A E aere E 71 N Negative Peak detector AAA 156 noise A A weneendds 110 136 source exterrial econ 93 150 Normalization KEZ EE 77 O occupied bandwidth civic tias 120 A EE 56 offset TOQUEN ey iie cte eret cere enc 62 80 129 reference level arisini 63 82 136 Offset Br
12. To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 305 INPut EATT on page 305 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 240 Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 96 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 240 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements Abs Absolute scaling The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of t
13. Example Manual operation SENSe Subsystem ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Checks only the relative limits Relative limits are defined as rel ative to the measured power in the reference range AND Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when both limits are violated OR Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated RST REL ESP RANG3 LIM STAT AND Sets for all ranges the combined absolute relative limit check See Limit Check 1 4 on page 113 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel Value This command sets the reference level for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range Parameters Value Example Manual operation 1 20 range Refer to the data sheet RST 20 dBm ESP RANG2 RLEV 0 Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm See Ref Level on page 112 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command sets the sweep time for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt SweepT
14. Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 309 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 285 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 308 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trace menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Mode for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Gest MEG uui deer oreet e o Dr ita 86
15. Start PCG O Stop PCG 4 Fig 6 8 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the compo site EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an ade quate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACCuracy see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES MACCuracy see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 7 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Error for all codes That means that in this result display the Code Domain Error Power is projected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one PCG The y axis represents the error power You can select the base spreading factor in the Base Spreading Factor on page 70 field and the number of evaluated PCGs in the Capture Length on page 64 field The meas
16. This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Power Sensor R amp S FSV K9 is installed For details see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 1 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 4 7 6 4 8 6 4 9 6 4 10 6 4 11 6 4 12 6 4 13 6 4 14 6 4 1 Further Information This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 313 Further Information Predefined Channel Tables ctn erdt cette ente tette 151 Relationship Between Channel and Modulation Type 154 Working with Channel Tables 12 coto teet nta 155 Detector Ove Wisconsin ttg d ntt dv ebd d d 156 Trace Mode OV6IVI8W itte toe Hl ec et eee ttg ad Ete eb ea dade binae dde 157 selecting the Appropriate Filter Type irren de ete t ge e ide ree Se 159 List of Available RRC and Channel FEilters uccaiso anaana 160 ASCII Fille Export Formal eet tret P aet end ee et oc e ee ARE RR 161 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask 162 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Eies 163 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 168 Ranges and Range Settings
17. niece ii d ee ev te dva boba 287 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt GTObeorange z nennen 287 SENSO IS WES PO NS ui aida 288 SENSO WES TIME csi cit 288 IGENSeISwWEep TIME AUTO 288 IGENSelSwWEepTebt tete tette t tette te tette te teens ets sosi d 289 SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Sweep Count on page 84 SENSe SWEep EGATe lt State gt This command switches on off the sweep control by an external gate signal If the external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as well In case of measurement with external gate the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several times The synchronization mechanisms with OPC OPC and WAI remain com pletely unaffected The sweep end is detected when the required number of measurement points 691 in Spectrum mode has been recorded Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on
18. 1 4 window lt m gt 1 4 marker Example CALC MARK FUNC TDPI Activates marker and positions it at TDPICH 16 128 CALC MARK Y Queries value of the relative Code Domain Power of the transmit diversity pilot channel Usage Event Mode CDMA Manual operation See F TDPICH BTS mode only on page 90 7 2 3 7 2 3 1 7 2 3 2 7 2 3 3 7 2 3 4 7 2 3 5 7 2 3 6 7 2 3 7 7 2 3 1 CALCulate Subsystem Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual CALCulate DELTamarker subevetem eene 191 CALCulate LIMit subevsiem sse eene nnne 199 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subevstem eene 206 CALCulate MARKer subevstem nennen 211 CALCulate PSE subevstem sse 218 CALCulate STATistics SUDSYSte MN nene nnns 219 Other Referenced CAL Culate Commandes 223 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint 3 191 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHontlxedRbOnty 192 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe senes 192 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHonbhOise AUTO 193 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise S TATe esee 193 GAEGulate m DEETaiarker mod IT 194 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT eene entere 194 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nnns 194 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 195 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM Aimum RICH 195 CAL Culate nz D
19. AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 133 CONFigure Subsystem The CONFigure subsystem contains commands for configuring the measurements CONFigure CDPower Subsystem K82 K84 This subsystem contains the commands for measurement selection and configuration Further setting commands for the spectrum emission mask measurement are descri bed in the CALCulate ESPectrum subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDoclass sss 225 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABIe STATe esses enne 227 CONFigure GDPower BTS ECTABIe GA Talog ect ttt rte vtt 227 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent sess nnn nnn 227 GCONFigure GDPower BTSI CTABIE COPY icono then SEENEN SEENEN 228 CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS E C TABIe DATA iret iii 228 GONFigure GDPower BTS CTABle DATA 2 en eerie pen enean nidad 229 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete eene nnne nnne 230 CONFIgure cDPower BTSECTABIeNAME t Lene eae Rer tai aeu none nec tes 231 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTODFe dieere ai aas pe a p es 231 CONFloure CDbower BITGlCTAble GE ect EEN CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier EGTATel essen 231 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ESTATel nenne ennenen nee eeorerersrernn nn 232 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency eese 232 CONFloure CDbo
20. CCDF measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function signal statistics CDPower Code Domain Analyzer measurement ESPectrum check of signal power Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth measurement of the occupied bandwidth POWer Signal Channel Power measurement with predefined settings according to the CDMA2000 standard RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Code Domain Analyzer on page 100 See Power on page 100 See Ch Power ACLR on page 100 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 110 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 120 See CCDF on page 121 DISPlay Subsystem 7 4 DISPlay Subsystem The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as well as of measurement data on the display DIS Play MAB e 235 bpISPlayPWINDGWSITS S EE ae tee Dead eio ena et EL ener eo eae ete eg 235 DISPlayEWINDOwen SSELetto ooo aos 236 DISPlayE WINDOWS ESTATE uri 236 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE cceceeeeecee cece ee eee eee aeaeaeaeeaaeaeedeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeenenes 236 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe cocino Een 237 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe esses enne nnne 238 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelAUlTO nennen 238 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese 239 DISPl
21. INIMiate lt n gt CONMGAS rrt ntn tr A ERE PX EXC at xe eX EXTR eR INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous ll E E EE ll ME BIEN INPUt Eurip INPUtATTenuation AUTO E INPURGOUPIING EE INPUEBIO GDEVIOB rone intres MU UL EU 301 INPUEDIQ RANGO AUTO rti ir tp eed vae ges OE etd e be e pv gts de amavis 302 INPutDIQ RANGe COUPlitid i cot tore rct ade 303 lei deele MEET EE 303 INPutDIQ RANGSEUPPer UNI ereeschen eset annie e cad v gt Pete de dore 303 INPUEDIQ SRATO me EE 304 MINUS RAMS ATO 304 INPUEE A Ticos tn EENEG EEN AE INPut EATT AUTO mS INPUEEATIES leese INPUEGAIN STA Toco INPUEIMPEdaNC cion agents leide Be O NO INS Tr ment NSELGCL contenter nr Ente ae INSTr ment SELect itte r rer ptr daa EE MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST ss MMEMory STOResn TRACE tee rope t ree enter re ndi ek e HR hr RE TREE ERE ER Le eR AE 313 OQUTPUtEIFESOUR CO EE 313 GUI Cem 313 STATUS QUEStionable SYNC CONDIION KE 290 STAT s QUEStionable S d Ter ME CU KEE 291 SY olem DIS Play U PD ates E ASS 314 TRAC lt gt DATA NEE 292 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDO fisis taco nia rai er th tectae nere pns TRIGgersnsESEQuencsrHOBBoff TIME EE TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HODLBo
22. Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 308 Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Predefined Channel Table Settings Channel Search Mode Predefined Auto Search Inactive Channel Threshold epp dB Channel Tables RECENT BPC RC4 MPC RC1 MPC RC4 TDC RC4 Both Paths 6 Channels RC4 Predefined channel tables allow you to customize measurements very quickly and easily They are included in the option by default and contain settings according to spe cific standards For details on the predefined channel tables refer to chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 151 In addition new channel tables can be created and saved to be used in measurements Channel Search Mode Channel Table Settings Defines the kind of channel table used for the measurement Auto The Auto Search mode scans the whole code domain including all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers for active channels The automatic search provides an overview of the channels con tained in the signal If channels are not detected as being active change the threshold see Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 or select the Predefined channel search type Predef Performs the code domain measurement on the basis of the active predefined channel table All c
23. Table 6 9 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measure ment point RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis pm e EEN Detector Indicator Function Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Number of measured values During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSV increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscil lator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the pre cision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is a
24. This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The transmission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the lowest power or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CAL Culatecn MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 189 Parameters Channel Example Manual operation SENSe Subsystem MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent chan nels uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel See ACLR Reference on page 104 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual lt ChannelNumber gt This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer Parameters lt ChannelNumber gt Example
25. a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey R amp S FSV K82 K83 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 _ _ HHHHMMMWA gt gt gt _z el b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed screen A shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error By default the R amp S FSV K82 displays two measurement screens After a preset screen A is always the Code Domain Power result display Screen B is always the Result Summary display For more information on the display concept refer to the Display Config softkey Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency e Press the SETUP key Press the Reference Int Ext softkey to switch to an external reference Screen A again show
26. a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default Screen A shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement including the values for the Composite EVM 4 7 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vec tor represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the refer ence signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the PCGs and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference sig nal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal a
27. sees 191 CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem eene ene 191 7 2 3 2 7 2 3 3 7 2 3 4 7 2 3 5 7 2 3 6 7 2 3 7 7 2 1 CAL Culate Subsystem CALCulate LIMIt subsystem iiie da daa as 199 CALCulate LIMit ESPectruM subevstem ccoo n cnn nn n cnn rnnnnn rra 206 CALCulate MARKer subevstem acc nn n cnn nn nn nn rra 211 CALCulate PSE SUDSYSTOM isis ia C dd CE EDS 218 CALCulate STATistics subsvstem nana nnnrn narran crac 219 Other Referenced CAL Culate Commandes 223 CAL Culate FEED Subsystem The CALCulate FEED subsystem selects the result display for the measurement data This corresponds to the result display selection in manual operation BO D EE 182 CALCulate lt n gt FEED result display This command selects the result display for the measured data In MS mode the results are displayed for the branch selected by SENSe CDPower MAPPing Suffix n 1 4 screen R amp S FSV K82 K83 Remote Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Parameters result display XPOW CDP XPOW CDP RAT XPOW CDEP XTIM CDP ERR CTABle XTIM CDP PVSLot XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary XTIM CDP MACCuracy XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain XTIM CDP SYMB CONStellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM XTIM CDP BSTReam XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation XTIM CDP PVSYmbol XTIMe CDPower CHIP MAGNitude XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASEe XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASEe XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude XPOW CDP C
28. 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels Manual operation See Absolute Limit on page 107 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adja cent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute command This mechanism allows automatic check ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt O to 100dB the value for the lower limit must be lower than the lt UpperLimit gt value for the upper limit RST
29. ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Mode all Manual operation See Meas Start Stop on page 120 DIAGnostic n SERVice NSOurce State This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 93 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of evaluation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See ASCII File Export on page 116 See Decim Sep on page 117 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INTTiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using max hold or averaging functions Other Commands Referenced in this Manual In single sweep mode you can synchronize to
30. Auto Search mode is enabled in the Channel Table Settings dialog box Sort New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Sorts the table according to the following criteria in the specified order Channel state active channels first then inactive channels Channel type special channels like F PICH or F SYNC first then data channels e Spreading factor in ascending order e Code number in ascending order Save New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Saves the table under its specified name in the xml format If you edit a channel table and want to keep the original channel table change the name of the edited channel table before saving it Cancel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Closes the dialog box and returns to the Channel Table Settings dialog box Changes applied to the channel table are lost Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Reload New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Reloads the original content of the copied channel table This softkey is available for the New Channel Table dialog box and the Edit Channel Table dialog box Delete Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel table The currently active channel table cannot be deleted Restore Default Tables Channel Table Settings Restores the predefined channel tables see chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 151 to their factory set values Existing channel t
31. Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of carrier signals to be taken into account in channel and adjacent channel power measurements Values from 1 to 18 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 281 of Adj Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of adjacent channels to be considered in the adjacent channel power measurement Values from 0 to 12 are allowed The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels 0 Only the channel powers are measured 1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured 2 The channel powers the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 are measured 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but one higher and lower adja cent channel alternate channel 2 are measured 12 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and the power of the all higher and lower channels alternate channel 1 to 11 are measured Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 273 Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog to define the channel settings for all channels Independant of
32. Channel Bitstream Power vs PCG Result Sum mary Code Domain Error Power C Composite EVM RMS Peak Code Domain Power Channel Constellation EWM vs Symbol C Composite Constellation The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily The current configuration of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is displayed in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations For details see chapter 6 1 2 Configuring the Display on page 37 Select Opens a dialog box to select a specific channel PCG or branch MS mode only The results of that channel PCG branch are then shown in the result display For details on the effects of this softkey refer to Channel Code Number on page 75 and Power Control Group on page 75 For the following measurements an evaluation on PCG level is possible chapter 6 1 3 1 Code Domain Power on page 38 chapter 6 1 3 2 Channel Table on page 40 chapter 6 1 3 4 Result Summary on page 42 chapter 6 1 3 5 Code Domain Error Power on page 44 chapter 6 1 3 8 Channel Constellation on page 47 chapter 6 1 3 9 EVM vs Symbol on page 48 chapter 6 1 3 10 Composite Constellation on page 49 chapter
33. DAS PIS WEE 87 lte H A UTE 87 E ET 87 Rus X 87 Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow n TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t MODE on page 236 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is
34. Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 143 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are speci fied in the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz SENSe Subsystem Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 138 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio to define the ratio VBW RBW Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 138 See Video BW Auto on page 139 See Default Coupling on page 143 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth Hz and resolution band width Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command VBW RBW is reciprocal to that of the manual operation RBW VBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 01 to 1000 RST 3 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 resolution bandwidth Manual operation See RBW VBW Sine 1 1 on page 141 See RBW VBW Pulse 1 on page 142 See RBW VBW Noise 10 on page 142 See RBW VBW Manual on page 142 See Span RBW Auto 100 on page 142 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE Mode
35. Insert after Range Insert after Range remote control Insert before RANGE civic Insert before Range remote control IQ Capture Settings K82 sss Last Spam M eeh Limit Chk On Off remote control g Limits On Off remote control Link Mkr1 and Detal iniiis enne Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control as List Evaluation reet tries List Evaluation On Off 2 2 nee Load Standard m MANU Al Manual remote control sieisen Margin Marker 1 remote control Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker 1 16 Marker 1 Marker 2 16 Marker 2 remote control nete Marker 3 remote control Gi Marker 4 remote control 0 0 0 eee eee eee eerie Marker Norm Delta 0 0 0 0 cece Marker Norm Delta remote control Market Stepsize miii tne Marker Stepsize remote control Marker Table Off On Aut remote control sis Marker Table On Off eae Marker to Trace remote control 197 Max Hold Meas K82 Meas StarUSlop ee intere Meas Start Stop remote control Meas De ot erret rrr Meas Time Manual nn Min Min remote control More MALIK IS eer tev rtr nn tr tr een ren Pe sees Next Min Next Min remote control Next Min Mode abs sssssssssseeeeneee 91 Next Peak oia a ta exe SE 89 Ne
36. MAXimum PEAK CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINimUMILEF T 1 iit ke rone in cem rer Gane ania CAL Culate nz MAbkerczmz MiNimumNENT eee enne nnnrnn nnn sn tnnrr it renrs sr rnn nnn n rennen CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt m CALCulate n MARKer m MINimump PEAK eeeseeseeeeeee eene enne nennen nennt rene rennen nnns CALCulatesn gt MARKerem gt il RACE sccscecsscesencercencentnnt ans eege to thigh PR usce E CHR IUE Hua DRM ens siena ERR CAL Culate lt n gt iMARKGIrsim gt X aoa cot le ctp A oe dk abe race 215 GALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits S TATe s conii tah tre then thin cn 216 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe ak CAL Culate lt n gt MARKGrsm gt iY 2 nus A Ce pae a e e d d dud ud CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe GAL Culatesn s PEAKsearch PSEarch AU TO D 218 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin 218 CALCulatesn gt PEAKsearch PSEarch P SHOW EE 219 CALCulate xn PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges 1 eene etant erneut tnit natat erben nan 219 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate sese nenne 218 GALGulate n S TATistics CCDF S l ATe rtr rtr ren ttr nra tra er e tenera tn enr 219 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples GALGulate sn S TATistics PRES Bb iii rere SEENEN Eed GALCulate n STATistics RESUlt Trace innert trennen eia cid rehenes 220 CALCulate n STATi
37. Manual operation SELect on page 189 1 to 18 RST 1 POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 3 Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference channel See ACLR Reference on page 104 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent chan nel ADJ The modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Parameters lt Spacing gt Example Manual operation 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 14 kHz POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel to 33 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz and so on See Spacing on page 104 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel ALT1 ALT2 A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing cau ses a change by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Exam
38. Parameters Level 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STOP 20 Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the range Manual operation See Abs Limit Stop on page 113 SENSe Subsystem SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Limit 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STAR 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the start frequency of the range Manual operation See Rel Limit Start on page 114 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Limit 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STOP 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the stop frequency of the range Manual operation See Rel Limit Stop on page 114 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt STATe State This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges Suffix range irrelevant Parameters State
39. Parameters lt Frequency gt Range O to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz Manual operation See Center on page 62 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x span value Default unit Hz SENSe Subsystem Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz Manual operation See CF Stepsize on page 80 See Manual on page 129 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span ON or sets the value of the center frequency entered via SENSe FREQuency CENTer OFF Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN Manual operation See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on pa
40. RANGE LOG the channel power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the channel power is output in W See Power on page 100 See Ch Power ACLR on page 100 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ State This command switches the query response of the power measurement results between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith The measurement results are output with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Suffix n m Selects the measurement window Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON Results output channel power density in dBm Hz OFF Results output channel power is displayed in dBm RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth For details on a complete measurement example refer to CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 187 Manual operation See Chan Pwr Hz on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasT ype gt This command selects and switches on the specified power measurement type in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem Note If CPOWer i
41. Range Linear x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling for the level axis in 96 The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in 9o referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default set ting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Range Lin Unit x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 y Axis Max Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 223 y Axis Min Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range Values in the range 1e value 0 1 are
42. Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are described here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expan ded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and programming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfa ces and error messages is also provided In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer Documentation Overview to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is no
43. See Power Bandwidth span gt 0 on page 120 SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power measurement The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center fre quencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to zero span and back Depending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with characteristic or very steep sided channel filters are used for band limitation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON Manual operation See Fast ACLR On Off on page 109 SENSe POWer NCORrection Mode This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSV performs a reference measurement to deter mine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled when ever one of these parameters is changed A corresponding message is displayed on the screen Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change 7 6 2 6 SENSe Subsystem Parameters Mode ON Performs noise correction OFF Performs no noise correction AUTO Performs noise correction After a parameter change noise correction is restarted automati cally an
44. Stop Ch 63 Fig 6 2 Code Domain Power Result Display in Hadamard code sorting order Active and inactive data channels are defined via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 The power values of the active and unassigned channels are shown in different colors In addition codes with alias power can occur These codes obtain power components originating either from a spreading factor higher than the base spreading factor or from the own and or another antenna as a result of transmit diver sity The following colors are defined e Red selected channel Channel Code Number e Yellow active channel e Cyan inactive channel e Light blue alias power of higher spreading factor e Magenta alias power as a result of transmit diversity If codes with alias power are displayed set the highest base spreading factor available in the Base Spreading Factor field It is not recommended to select more detailed result displays such as Channel Con stell for unassigned or inactive codes since the results are not valid Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 39 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis AAA Ru s s sX N n sr H P EEE n Qlc ES EEE eS a Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 T To query these results
45. ati 131 L Range Log 00 A an DOR t bris 132 L Rande Lon DOM eenegen otn A 132 L Range Log QU BB oec obest itt Ut i uto ease egenen 132 Eege 132 M 0 ib A aldara E E 133 L Range Log A A 133 Fa 1E e RETE RETE 133 L Range Lin ee 133 TEE 133 Pres QI Oo geogr ed Rb ern tette do edd Pesto e a 134 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual oia rra 134 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 135 EAREN OMO S e 135 El Atten Mode AUtO E BEE 135 Ret Re e M 136 ists iuo lioe ER 136 Ego ADSI RO I m 136 Noise el TE 136 Mpt e p oj c 137 DUETO 137 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 239 Range Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis This softkey and its submenu are available for RF measurements Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 241 Display r
46. measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On In in dB D 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 Frequency in MHz The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor on page 72 and the Cut Off Frequency on page 72 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 233 Roll Off Factor Demod Settings BTS mode Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter The roll off factor defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 233 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 232 Cut Off Frequency Demod Settings BTS mode Defines the cut off frequency of the RRC filter The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 233 CONFigure CD
47. the range is 0 to Capture Length 1 The defined value is valid for any measurement which takes PCGs into account for further information see also the Select on page 79 softkey The selected PCG is highlighted in red on the screen as opposed to the others which are displayed in yel low Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 251 Channel Code Number Result Settings The entry in this field corresponds to a specific code to be examined The valid range is from O to BSF 1 The base spreading factor BSF is either 64 or 128 depending on the setting of the Base Spreading Factor on page 70 field It can not be edited via this field The selected channel is marked red in the Channel Table In the Code Domain Power display and the Code Domain Error Power display all codes belonging to this channel are marked red The defined value is valid for any measurement that takes a selected channel into account For further information see the Select on page 79 softkey The rotary knob behavior depends on the result display and the graphic display e in the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays the rotary knob always selects the adjacent channel The position of the adjacent channel in the diagram depends on the Code Order on page 76 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements e inthe Channel Table result display the rotary knob is used to scroll through the list Remote command SENSe CDP
48. tor Choose the radio configuration usually 3 5 Activate the channel by editing the State field The other values symbol rate and power are automatically calculated If there is a conflict with another channel in the table a red diamond is displayed in the Domain Conflict field of the conflicting channels 1 You can delete a channel with the Delete Channel on page 69 softkey Note that a channel is deleted without further notice 2 Ifyou want to discard your changes you can restore the original table with the Reload on page 70 softkey All your changes will be lost You can also restore the default channel tables delivered with the R amp S FSV with the Restore Default Tables on page 70 This recovery can be done even if you have saved changes to these tables For more information on softkeys dialog boxes and parameters concerning channel tables refer to the description of the Channel Table Settings on page 65 dialog box Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSV The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSV are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available
49. 0 dB Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command pro duces a query error Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Return values Result The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second denotes the upper adjacent chan nel CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dB CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels
50. 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values lt Reserved1 gt Always 0 reserved lt Reserved2 gt Always 0 reserved lt Status gt 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily lt CDPRelative gt Power value in dB Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME MEN TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 Mode EVDO BTS Manual operation See Add Channel on page 69 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO MS mode K85 only For BTS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 228 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt ChannelType gt CONFigure Subsystem The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PICH 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE lt CodeClass gt 2104 lt CodeNumber gt 0 15 lt Mapping
51. 127 stop frequency supply voltage external noise source Sweep eon m E Sweep Continue single sweep eeeeees 84 144 Go dee TEE 84 144 Single TIME 25 cote haere etti eua Sweep list Fast SEM remote control AA 256 Sweep List Symmetrical it reet eterne 115 SWeSDpTebl 3c bere rere br a rr ter pnta ens 143 WG ee al eei Rave ege 84 Sweep time Coupling Symbol Magnitude Error Symbol Phase EItOF acomodo tentis T Time Phase Estimation G2 7T trace power measurement eege Eegen 108 Trace Clear Write ccc irte sicat to 86 157 Trace menu KW 86 Trace mode A decieasthacavaleeesioaecsatdecaeacumnpteierse A 87 158 EE 159 Clear Write 86 157 Memel E 87 158 Min ole eT 87 158 d coa 87 158 trigger SIOPE daia 64 85 Trigger url 65 86 Trigger menu WRG 2 85 Trigger Source External Cc me ts 64 85 Trigger Source Free Run e E 64 85 TX Settings le e 96 U Upper Level Hysteresis crm 92 Upper case commands eese 180 V VBW RMS detector i nbn ticis ces ate See 139 157 Video bandwidthi 3 rnit ae canta rina t rindan tia 138 View trace mode cci nea da crois rea 87 158 W weighting LEE 105 Y Y Axis Maximum vut YSAXI
52. 157 Further Information Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH See DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sample
53. 22 22 idas 249 Ei Ee el EE 250 EIER ee TEE 250 SENSE eBlzeu iccici a TAA E EEA Aa A AATE 250 PENSE CDPOWE E 250 SENS amp e ICDBPOWet SLO RE 251 SENSE ee Blei m 251 SENSe CDPower ANTenna lt AntennaState gt This command deactivates the orthogonal transmit diversity two antenna system or defines the antenna for which the result display evaluated Parameters lt AntennaState gt OFF 1 2 OFF The aggregate signal from both antennas is fed in 1 The signal of antenna 1 is fed in 2 The signal of antenna 2 is fed in RST OFF For further details refer to Antenna Diversity on page 72 Example CDP ANT 2 Selects antenna 2 Mode CDMA Manual operation See Antenna Diversity on page 72 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNo gt This command selects the code number For further details refer to Channel Code Number on page 75 Parameters lt CodeNo gt lt numeric value gt Range O to base spreading factor 1 Increment 1 RST 0 SENSe Subsystem Example CDP CODE 8 Selects the eighth channel Mode CDMA Manual operation See Channel Code Number on page 75 See Select on page 79 SENSe CDPower ICThreshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLev
54. 4 Q S2CH 6 8 6 4 1 1 Relationship Between Channel and Modulation Type Channel type Channel Modulation F PICH Pilot channel BPSK F SYNC Synchronisation channel BPSK F PCH Paging channel BPSK F TDPICH Transmit diversity pilot channel BPSK F APICH Auxiliary pilot channel BPSK F ATDPICH Auxiliary transmit diversity channel BPSK F BCH Broadcast channel QPSK F CPCCH Common power control channel QPSK F CACH Common assignment channel QPSK F CCCH Common control channel QPSK Further Information F PDCCH Packet data control channel QPSK F PDCH Packet data channel QPSK 8PSK or 16QAM CHAN Data channel radio configuration 1 2 BPSK CHAN Data channel radio configuration 3 5 QPSK 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables Creating a channel table Select the Code Domain Analyzer softkey Select the Channel Table Settings softkey The Channel Table Settings dialog box is displayed Select the Predef channel search mode and set a threshold for inactive channels Press the New Copy Edit on page 67 softkey to create a new channel table The New Channel Table dialog box is displayed The new channel table contains no data at all Enter a name for the new channel table e g Test Table in the corresponding field The name you enter in this field is also the name of the table channel file Enter a description for your new channel table e g
55. 6 1 3 11 Power vs Symbol on page 50 chapter 6 1 3 12 Channel Bitstream on page 50 For the following measurements an evaluation on channel level is possible e chapter 6 1 3 3 Power vs PCG on page 41 chapter 6 1 3 4 Result Summary on page 42 chapter 6 1 3 8 Channel Constellation on page 47 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements chapter 6 1 3 9 EVM vs Symbol on page 48 chapter 6 1 3 11 Power vs Symbol on page 50 chapter 6 1 3 12 Channel Bitstream on page 50 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 244 SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 251 SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 245 6 2 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu in CDMA2000 Analysis for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description of the Frequency menu for the base unit pl ra 80 GP ccr E 80 FICQUCMIOY OMS GU e a 80 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 E fcenter E fmax ES SPAN min 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter fmax fmax and SPAN min are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 270 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to en
56. 92 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 252 Auto Freq Defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by determining the highest frequency level in the frequency span This function uses the signal counter thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 254 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft key Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 254 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 92 e Meas Time Auto on page 92 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 92 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 253 Meas Time Auto Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms
57. A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 94 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO State If enabled the sample rate of the digital baseband IQ input signal is set automatically by the connected device if the currently used sample rate is provided indicated by the lt SampleRateType gt parameter in the result of the INPut DIO CDEVice command This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Manual operation See El Atten
58. ACP menu Bandclass on page 101 The settings for each bandclass are provided in xml files that are located in the direc tory C NR SNINSTRNsem stdVevdo al The files themselves are named DO DL BCO1 XML bandclass 1 to DO DL BC17 XML bandclass 17 By selecting one of the bandclasses from the dialog box the correct file is loaded automatically The file can also be loaded manually see Load Standard softkey Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 225 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Load Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to select an XML file which includes the desired standard specifi cation For details on the provided XML files refer to chapter 6 4 10 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 168 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard on page 257 Save As Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Save As Standard dialog box in which the currently used SEM settings and parameters can be saved and exported into an xml file Enter the name of the file in the File name field For details on the structure and contents of the XML file refer to chapter 6 4 9 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 163 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe on page 257 Meas Start Stop Spectrum Emission Mask Aborts restarts the current measurement and displa
59. AL Temate channel eene 278 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannelNAME CHANnel channelz nennen 278 SENSeJTPOWerACHannel E 278 SENSe POWer ACHanneEPRESetRLEVWVel nennt ann x nineteenth Ra nhe ia RR RR nuu 279 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE eren 279 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO eese 279 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUal essen 280 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel cessere 280 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel sese 281 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel eese 281 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNtL cesses nennen rnnt 281 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDIH 02 cccec cee ce eee ca eee ee cece eee ee eaee saa eesaa nnne nnn nennen 282 SENSeTPOWerHSPebl i tete erede etat ea 282 SENSe POWer NCOR eclioh E 282 Eimer i e 283 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command sets the number of adjacent channels upper and lower channel in pairs The figure O stands for pure channel power measurement Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt 0 to 12 RST 1 SENSe Subsystem Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched on Manual operation See of Adj Chan on page 102 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANne
60. Activate cdma2000 MS by default CDP relative is displayed in screen A and Result Summary in screen B INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep TRIG SOUR EXT Select external trigger source CDP LCOD MASK HF Define long code mask INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization Mode CDMA Manual operation See Long Code Mask on page 74 SENSe CDPower LCODe OFFSet lt CodeOffset gt Defines the long code offset including the PN offset This offset is applied at the next trigger pulse which cannot occur until a setup time of 300 ms has elapsed This command is ignored if SENSe CDPower LCODe MASK is set to 0 Parameters lt CodeOffset gt Offset in chips in hexadecimal format with a 52 bit resolu tion The chips offset is calculated as follows tSinceS tartGPS 1 2288 MChips s where tSinceStartGPS is defined in seconds This value corresponds to the GPS timing since 6 1 1980 00 00 00 UTC RST HO SENSe Subsystem Example The hexadecimal offset of 258000 h chips is set for the first even second clock trigger INST SEL MC2K Activate cdma2000 MS by default CDP relative is displayed in screen A and Result Summary in screen B INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep TRIG SOUR EXT Select external trigger source CDP LCOD MASK H2 Define long code mask CDP LCOD OFFS H258000 Define long code offset INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization Mode CDMA
61. CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit dBm dBuV etc The function of this softkey is identical to the Ref Level softkey in the Amplitude menu see Ref Level on page 62 For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel on page 222 x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens the Range submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the statistics measurement selected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe on page 221 Range Log 100 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 238 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Range Log 50 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on
62. CFiLter 2 kHz CFiLter 2 4 kHz CFiLter SSB 2 7 kHz CFiLter 3 kHz CFiLter 3 4 kHz CFiLter 4 kHz CFiLter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFiLter 5 kHz CFiLter 6 kHz CFiLter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFiLter AM Radio 10 kHz CFiLter 12 5 kHz CFiLter CDMAone 14 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFiLter 16 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFiLter 21 kHz CFiLter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 25 kHz CFiLter 30 kHz CFiLter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFiLter 100 kHz CFiLter 150 kHz CFiLter FM Radio 192 kHz CFiLter PHS 200 kHz CFiLter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFiLter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 228 MHz CFiLter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFiLter DAB 2 MHz CFILter 3 MHz CFiLter 3 75 MHz CFiLter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFiLter 20 MHz CFiLter 28 MHz CFiLter 40 MHz CFiLter 6 4 7 ASCII File Export Format The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns dep
63. Channel table created for test purposes in the Description field Build your channel table by adding the channels with the configuration you need or Measure the current signal by pressing the Meas on page 69 softkey The R amp S FSV automatically adds the channels of the current signal to the channel table Refer to the New Copy Edit on page 67 softkey for a description of all parame ters relating to a channel Save your table by pressing the Save on page 69 softkey All data is lost if you just close the dialog box The list of available channel tables in the Channel Table Settings dialog box now contains the Test Table Editing a channel table Select the Code Domain Analyzer softkey Select the Channel Table Settings softkey Select your recently created channel table Press the New Copy Edit on page 67 softkey to open and modify the channel table Each row in the channel table represents one channel 6 4 3 Further Information 4 Sort the channels in the channel table by pressing the Sort on page 69 softkey The R amp S FSV sorts the channels according to the rules listed in the Sort on page 69 softkey description 5 Adda new channel by pressing the Add Channel on page 69 softkey a b c d e Select a channel type e g a data channel In the Channel Type field select CHAN from the dropdown menu Sspecify the channel number a value between 0 and 127 and spreading fac
64. Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis 178 NOtatlOM 179 CALCulate Subsystem 1 c iaa 181 CONFigure Subsystem 2 1 eee retinent tenera cette svete EE DR nnana einnar 224 NIE GEET EE E 235 INSTrument Subsystetm 1 oie rater trrenai eere ena ia anne kan aoc naa uua SE siaina 242 CIE EEEJDIILCI 243 STATUS subsyst em 2 rri ie a 290 TRACe Subsysteim 2 nnne cce arai tcn na ia rau asi Da Yan iienaa r ERR ua sted sevens 291 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eene 300 Status Reporting System of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option FZ EA RE E 315 CL A 316 AppendiR E 317 List of Command D 320 IT E E E E EE 326 1 1 Documentation Overview Preface Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows e Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g
65. Delta on page 147 CALCulate LIMit subsystem CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbowerACHannel AbBGolute nunn nnnnnnnnne 199 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STAT c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaea 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel REI ativel seeren e eeseesrsrersrsrsrnrnenen nn 201 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbowerACHannel RE Gut 201 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe sees 202 CAL Culate nzLlMitzksACbowerAlTemate Channelz ADBGolute noeneen nenene 203 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate chanmnezfREL ativel reenen 204 CALOulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe 204 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe Lecce aaa essen iaaii anna 205 CALECulatesne LIMIESKS TEE 206 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel during adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standar
66. ESPectrum LIMitS oooococncccccccnccoonnnccoonnnocnnnconononononnonononononnnnnonons 206 CAL CulatesmnLIMitsksESPectrumiMQODE cuco dai ee dcin 207 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks E bechumbClass CasszTESClushvel nerne 207 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class COUNt esses eren 208 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit S TATe sss 208 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum essere 209 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cassz MiNimum 209 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumbRtGtore ense nnne na nnne nans 210 GCALCulatesmnLIMiteks ESPectrum VALUue traitent osea nne ttr ex reete inedite 210 a CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits Limits This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters Limits Example CALCulate Subsystem 1 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 separated by com mas 200 0 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 in ascending order separated by commas 200 CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes 200 50 50 50 50 70 70 200 Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum MODE Mode This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in
67. FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult com mand Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 SENSe Subsystem Example CDP TPM ON Activates timing and phase offset CDP SLOT 2 Selects power control group 2 CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES TOFF Reads out timing offset of the code with number 11 in PCG 2 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES POFF Reads out the phase offset of the code with number 11 in PCG 2 Mode CDMA Manual operation See Time Phase Estimation on page 77 See Normalize on page 77 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual SENSe ADJust Subsystem SENSe JADJUSCAL e 252 IGENZGelADlust CONEiouration HvGTeresls L Ower 252 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer eise 253 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURalIOn 22 2 2 22 ccc carente ear 253 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE A 253 IGENZGelADlust FR Ouencn eene nn en esnnettn rere re irit r nennt nnne 254 ISENSeTADJuSEDDEWVel atro taa ttt epi eot td ee vent et rrt aceti 254 SENSe ADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL Manual operation See Auto All on page 91 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer ence level is automa
68. Fre quency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single Power Control Group PCG It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values described using the dialog boxes Alternatively most of the settings can also be modi fied by using the corresponding hardkeys as in the base unit e g the center frequency can be either set in the Frontend Settings dialog box or via the FREQ key o In the following examples adjusting the settings of the code domain measurements is Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connec tors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard CDMA2000 Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 BS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BS Analysis 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement
69. Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Selects the 10th set for further analysis Mode CDMA EVDO TDS Manual operation See Set to Analyze on page 64 SENSe CDPower SFACtor lt SpreadingFactor gt This command defines the base spreading factor If the base spreading factor of 64 is used for channels with a spreading factor of 128 code class 7 an alias power is dis played in the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power diagrams SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt SpreadingFactor gt 64 128 RST 64 Example CDP SFAC 128 Selects base spreading factor 128 Mode CDMA Manual operation See Base Spreading Factor on page 70 See Base Spreading Factor on page 73 SENSe CDPower SLOT numeric value This command selects the slot Power Control Group PCG to be analyzed Parameters numeric value Range O to TDS 62 CDMA capture length 1 WCDMA 14 Increment 1 RST 0 The capture length is defined via the SENSe CDPower IOLength on page 245 command Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Power Control Group on page 75 See Select on page 79 SENSe CDPower TPMeas State This command actives or deactivates the timing and phase offset evaluation of the channels to the pilot The results are queried using the TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 292 command and the CALCulate lt 1 4 gt MARKer lt 1 4 gt
70. MARKOS WP EE 217 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Marker Off on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position i e in descending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC MARK2 MAX LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next low
71. Mode Auto Man on page 83 INPut EATT AUTO State This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all Manual operation See El Atten On Off on page 83 See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 83 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on Manual operation See Preamp On Off on page 63 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input
72. Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 0 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Setan external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Setthe Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In screen B the result summary is displayed Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSV always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the result summary by default shown in screen B Measurements and Result Displays 6 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis The R amp S FSV equipped with the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option performs Code Domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 It is based on the Recommended Minimum Performance Standard for CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum Base Stations C S0010 C version 2 0 dated March 2006 This Standard has been approved by the following authority with th
73. R amp S FSV for digital out put to a connected device Transmitter Type RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instru ment If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The applica tion is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not
74. RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 258 Sweep Time Mode Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO on page 265 Sweep Time Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the sweep time value for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME on page 264 Ref Level Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the reference level for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel on page 264 RF Att Mode Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 261 RF Attenuator Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the attenuation value for that range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation on page 260 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Preamp Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Switches the preamplifier on or off Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe on page 261 Transd Factor Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emiss
75. RHO Factor on page 22 As the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option also supports the CDMA2000 Standard the examples are performed on an CDMA2000 signal General Test Setup The measurements are performed with the following units and accessories e An R amp S FSV equipped with the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option e R amp S SMU signal generator equipped with option SMU B9 B10 B11 baseband gen erator and SMUK46 CDMA2000 incl 1xEVDV e 1 coaxial cable 50 Q approximately 1 m N connector e 2 coaxial cables 50 Q approximately 1 m BNC connector 4 1 Test Setup for Base Station Tests This section describes the default settings of the R amp S FSV if itis used as a CDMA2000 base station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSV has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the Quick Start Guide Preparing For Use Furthermore the application firmware of the R amp S FSV K82 must be enabled Installation and enabling of the application firmware are descri bed in the Quick Start Guide chapter 3 Test Setup for Base Station Tests Risk of damage to the instrument Before taking the instrument into operation make sure that the housing covers are in place and their screws have been tightened the ventilation slits are free e no signal voltage levels above the permissible limits are applied to the inputs e the outputs of the unit are not overloaded or wrongly connected Failure to comply may r
76. S FSV automatically sets the capture length to 64 and the Capture Length on page 64 field is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 250 Set to Analyze IQ Capture Settings Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 250 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 309 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 309 Trigger Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger source Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The sweep starts after a positive or negative
77. SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 244 Base SF Long Code MS mode This softkey opens the Base SF Long Code dialog box These settings are used to identify the base stations during mobile measurements Common Base Spreading Factor Long Code Long Code Mask A Long Code Offset A Long Code Gen Setting Long Code Gen Mode 0 Standard ESG 101 Close Base Spreading Factor Base SF Long Code MS mode Sets the base spreading factor Possible values are 16 32 64 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements If channels with a spreading factor of 64 are analyzed use the base spreading factor 64 Otherwise alias power is displayed in the CODE DOMAIN POWER and CODE DOMAIN ERROR POWER diagram Remote command SENSe CDPower SFACtor on page 250 Long Code Mask Base SF Long Code MS mode Defines the long code mask of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF For the default mask value of 0 the long code offset refer to the LONG CODE OFF SET softkey is not taken into consideration Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe MASK on page 246 Long Code Offset Base SF Long Code MS mode Defines the long code offset including the PN offset in chips in hexadecimal format with a 52 bit resolution This value corresponds to the GPS timing since 6 1 1980 00 00 00 UTC This offset is applied at the next trigger pulse which cannot occur until a setup
78. This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path Changing the video filter position is possible only if the resolution bandwidth is lt 100 kHz 7 6 2 4 SENSe Subsystem Parameters Mode LiNear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier In linear mode measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level values if you halve the linear power the logarithmic level decreases by 3 dB LOGarithmic The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier RST LINear Example BAND VID TYPE LIN Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier SENSe FREQuency subsystem SENSe PREQUency CENTer 1 1er iaa 270 SENSE FREQuency GENTBESTEP E 270 ISENZGeJrbRtOuencv CENTer STEP AUTO 271 SENSeTPREQUSRnc CENTO STEP LINK 2 2 2112 1 Irt bet ctt delia 271 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACT OF ccoo 271 SENSe TFREQUu amp nDCY OFF EE 272 SENSe PREGUSIGCV ME 272 SENSe FREQusncy SPAN IFU LL iicet innear ii oau R aee exon 272 SENSeTFREOUSnCYSS DARE ce eere polea eode ner ex ex Eb tee nux ue me en Ex ada eee e aede qune a 272 SENSeJIFREQUSnDCIES FG ET 273 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring fre quency time domain
79. Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer On page 253 6 2 10 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 252 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 8 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements on page 150 Iwer OC EE 93 i i 93 einiges 93 Bi iz EE 94 L Connected Dorita noria EEA 94 L input Sampie nette TM 94 EAA A Ne Pe E 94 2r i 94 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 94 Digital Le INO c 94 EXI M os 95 NET 0 E K 96 SO MEDION RH 96 Lo nj ne 96 SN A 96 L R amp S II EE 96 t o5 A ata E ea 96 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digita
80. adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 288 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 288 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSV specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 272 6 3 4 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function e g a fast change between overview measurement and detailed measurement is possible Remote command Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is pro vided in the corresponding softkey description ru E 131
81. allowed The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit 96 Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 222 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 y Unit Abs Scaling CCDF Defines the scaling type of the y axis The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 222 Default Settings Scaling CCDF Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values x axis ref level 10 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 220 Adjust Settings Scaling CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 221 Gated Trigger On Off CCDF Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF channel The trigger source is changed to EXTERN if this function is switched on The gate ranges are defined using the Gate Ranges on page 125 soft
82. and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 164 Further Information For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 110 and the corre sponding parameter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 13 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R amp S FSV to interpret the file or not Since the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables either view one of the default files already stored on the R amp S FSV in the C Nr sNinstrNsem std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element and are to be inserted where noted The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview Also no example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above Italic font shows the placeholders for the values e The BaseFormat element is structured as follows RS SEM ACP FileFormat Version 1 0 0 0 gt lt Name gt Standard lt Name gt Instrument lt Type gt Instrument Type lt Type gt lt Application gt Application lt Application gt lt Instrument gt lt LinkDirection Name Name g
83. are dis played in the result diagram and result table Remote command S ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel on page 277 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt channel gt on page 278 S ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel lt channel gt on page 278 Weighting Filter Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define weighting filters for all channels Weighting filters are not available for all sup ported standards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available The dialog contains the following fields Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Field Description Channel e TX 1 18 TX channels e ADJ Adjacent channel e ALT1 11 Alternate channels Active Activates Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Alpha Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent chan nels of the same type Remote command POW ACH FILT CHAN1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt on page 276 Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel on page 276 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for TX channel 1 to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ACH ON See SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 276 Activates the weighting filter for the adjacent chann
84. c Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm R amp S FSV K82 K83 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the code domain power of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see previous example the repetition rate of the measurement increases In screen B the result summary is displayed In the row Trigger to Frame the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the PCG is shown 4 5 1 Adjusting the Trigger Offset The delay between the trigger event and the start of the PCG can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset Set an external trigger source and the trigger offset 1 Open the IQ Capture dialog box 2 Setthe Trigger Source option to External 3 Set the Trigger Offset to 100us to compensate analog delays of the trigger event In the two screens the following results are displayed Screen A shows the the same as above In screen B the result summary is displayed In the Trg to Frame result the offset between the trigger event and the start of the PCG has been adjusted 4 5 2 Behaviour With t
85. cecidi er t daa 171 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Meaeurements 172 Predefined CP ACUR Standards bei bv tee e nde 174 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters cccccccsceeeessteeeeesssteeeeeesnaees 175 Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables offer access to a quick configuration for the channel search The CDMA2000 BTS Analysis R amp S FSV K82 option provides the following set of channel tables compliant with the CDMA2000 specification Channel table Contents RECENT Contains the channels that were automatically cre ated during the last measurement with the Auto Search option activated for details refer to Chan nel Tables on page 67 MPC RC1 Base Station Main Path 6 Channels Channel table with F PICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 Radio Configuration 1 data channels MPC RCA Base Station Main Path 6 Channels Channel table with F PICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 Radio Configuration 4 data channels Further Information Channel table Contents TDC_RC4 Base Station Transmit Diversity Path 6 Channels Radio Configuration 4 Channel table with F PICH F SYNC F PCH and 6 data channels BPC_RC4 Base Station Both Paths 6 Channels Channel table with F PICH F TDPICH F SYNC F Radio Configuration 4 PCH and 6 data channels This standard does not specify a channel number for the data channels The CDMA2000 MS Analysis R amp S FSV K83 option provides the following s
86. check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix n lt k gt Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation Selects the measurement window irrelevant ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on the ACLR limit check See Limit Checking on page 106 See Relative Limit on page 107 See Absolute Limit on page 107 7 2 3 3 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt limit line Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 110 See Limit Check 1 4 on page 113 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem The CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec trum Emission Mask CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt
87. dBc Rel Limit Stop 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Limit Check 2 Relative Relative Relative Relative Fig 6 18 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In figure 6 18 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly 5 separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally Predefined CP ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement the test parameters for the channel and adjacent channel measurements are configured automatically The availa ble standards are listed below Predefined standards are selected using the CP ACLR Standard softkey or the CALC MARK FUNC POW PRI ES command Standard GUI Parameter SCPI Parameter EUTRA LTE Square EUTRA LTE Square EUTRa EUTRA LTE Square RRC EUTRA LTE Square RRC REUTRa W CDMA 3 84 MHz forward W CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3G W CDMA 3 84 MHz reverse W CDMA 3GPP REV RW3G R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Standard GUI Parameter SCPI Parameter CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD FIS95a CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD RIS95a CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0 CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0 CDMA J STD008 forward CDMA J STD008 FWD F19C FJ008
88. detector is used see chapter 6 4 3 Detector Overview on page 156 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label Further Information If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow n TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 237 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pul
89. eee rr cnn camaras 109 L Noise ColTeCliOn crecen eere ideas 110 EE 110 Spectrum EMISSION Mask etia c irae dd 110 EE 110 L Sweep List dial g BOX aper trn piae tbt rr rari 111 L Range Start Range Stop 111 L Fast SEM EE 111 A eae een nO ete aE 112 L pBpw ar nannana ararnar 112 oo NENNEN EUR 112 L Sweep Time Moda adea riae a ec bos 112 L Sweep BU MON TIT 112 E EE 112 O tnter nnne 112 L RF Atenustor tenen trennen 112 Ba s cm Tem 113 Ch EE TE 113 L kimit Check JA ici 113 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 LADS MES o EORR 113 L Abs Limit Bip icr tentata na tech gat 113 air Aio beten eege 114 Edad Labo Ss EE 114 L Close Sweep List tenen 114 L Insert before Range 114 uolo 0 40 MM 114 L Delete Range 114 L Symmetie A T TT 115 L Edit Reference Range 115 25 1 0 A ai ea s EAE EAEE 116 L List Evaluation On Off aen ttti rated that citu 116 EMA NEN RONDE 116 BE o du o NOTE T Ue 116 L Save Evaluation E ers erret eso ii 116 L ASCII File EXpOfLs sicui eire ecd etc s 116 zi EE 117 o AA 117 L Edit Power Classes 118 L Used Power Classes tetra ren 118 Bini rin A ule eri ai a Dosa 119 o tnter tenente tnae 119 L Add REMOVE NEN 119 EE EE 119 Liload Standard EE 120 DA A 120 L Meas NS EE 120 L Restore Standard Elles no concrnncnnc nr nrnne rca 120 Occupied BandWidth css iaa iia 120 L Power Bandwidth span gt OD 120 L Channel Bandwidth span gt 01 1
90. eter ettet Preamp On Off remote control A erret Ref Level remote control nei Res BW Auto Res BW Manual RF Atten Aulo rene te RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual 2 enis RF Atten Manual remote control Save remote control M SCAG HS Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Single Meas remote control Single Sweep Single Sweep remote control Eg M Sweep Count remote control e on rere teer teris Sweep Time remote control SWEEP TYPO ori de Hiari eds raisini in e UE HE Sweeptime Manual 130 139 144 Sweeptime Manual remote control 288 Trace Mode remote control sssss 236 Trg Gate Source remote control 307 309 Trigger Offset ees Bere Rp Video BW Auto 1 5 ai Video BW Manual VIEW ied Y Axis Maximum zu Y Axis MINIMUM dee retirees tea A Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis nennen 93 Upper Level Hysteresis nen entente rts 92 Sort Channel Table Kp 69 SPAM metis etate rt rue aein EEGENEN 129 Special characters 180 Spectrum Emission Mask 110 Eelere 55 Power Classes 118 start MEQUENCY i e rer rente ti ri iR 129 Step size Genter frequeriGy aeree rn tete
91. identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here SENSe CDPower Subsystem iii ed 243 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 252 SENSsiADJUst SUbsysteM iii 252 SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem sss 254 SENSe BANDwidth eubevstem enne entente 266 SENSe FREQuency SUBSYSTEM AA 270 SENSe POWer subsystem 2 2 1 dii d diuies ies dbeddsie Gedeauidavee Le ok Eds 273 SENSS SWEep subsysteM iii io 283 Other Commands in the SENSe Gubevstem conc ncnnnnnncnannns 289 SENSe CDPower Subsystem This subsystem sets the parameters for the code domain measurements mode SENSe CDPower ANTenna nono nn nr 244 Eier Re e RE 244 SENSe CBPower IC Threshold 2 2 ERENNERT NENNEN 245 E Ee RI ee 245 SENSE ICO PoWerLEVelADIUS E cossicurica ette ete rebat Ride Edge 245 SENSe CDPowerMAPPihg 2 reo eoda ater a 245 SENSe Subsystem ISBNSeJCDPoWerBbCODS EE 246 SENSe e all LOODS OFF E 246 SENSeTCDPowerECODeMODBE coco ek pre aane tke cea t cup ree ia Lo po due di 247 Eer RI de E TEE 247 SENSe CDPowetr ORDE inina ENEE a ee e e Y Ra EEN 247 SENSeJCDPowWetr OVERVIBM ace caes 248 SENSe CDPOWerPNOPF SSL ctetu ceret retenti reae Xo ehe eer eaae Lap eda d 248 SENSe CDPower PPReference 2c cut ac icit deren ai 249 SENSeTODPowWwerPREPGBIGBOE aruit era coin nna neret a erbe dx o EM SUR RxR Ren RF DA E 249 SENSe 1GDPOWeF OINVehl 2 2
92. impedance 75 Q should be selected if the 50 O input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 7 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 Q Example INP IMP 75 Manual operation See Input 50 0 75 Q on page 137 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Path on page 94 7 9 2 TRIGger Commands TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for dig
93. in the measurement and their respective power value MS mode the power is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q For signals with enabled power control use the default reference power setting For details refer to Power Reference on page 76 The measurement evaluates one code channel over the entire period of observation The selected PCG is displayed red You can set the number of PCGs by means of the Capture Length on page 64 field Power vs PCG 1 Clrw Start PCG O Stop PCG 4 Fig 6 4 Power vs PCG result display For measurements in which Antenna Diversity is inactive OFF or set to Antenna 1 the F PICH channel is used as reference while the F TDPICH channel is used for measurements in which Antenna Diversity is set to Antenna 2 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 41 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis To correctly detect the start of a power control group the external trigger must be used for power regulated signals Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSLot see CALCulate lt n gt H T T ED on page 182 6 1 3 4 Result Summary The Result Summary shows the results of various code domain measurements in a table The table is divided as follows e Global results e PCG results e Channel results Fig 6 5 Result Summary result display Remo
94. it 73 46 110 30 94 52 126 6t 65 66 61 68 69 Hd 11 73 T4 15 76 T 73 i3 30 Si 92 33 Si 35 36 ST 88 39 E 31 92 93 si 95 96 EI 98 99 100 101 102 103 105 106 107 103 109 110 111 112 113 14 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 1000000 100000 1 1000010 1000011 1000100 1000101 1000110 1000111 100 1001 1001010 4001011 1001100 1001101 1001110 1001111 1010000 1010001 1010010 1010011 1010100 1010101 1010110 1010111 1011000 1011001 1011010 1011011 1011100 1011101 1011110 1011111 1100000 1100001 1100010 4100011 1100100 1100101 1100110 1100111 1101001 1101010 1101011 1101100 1101101 1101110 1101111 1110000 1110001 1110010 1110011 1110100 1110101 1110110 1110111 1111000 1111001 1111010 1111011 1111100 1111101 1111110 1111111 o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o o o Bil o oj o oj o of o oj o ofj o ofj o ofj o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o o oo o o o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj ooa ln nn jo oo ojo A PA oo ojoo o PA PRA o o ojo o o of lk se joo ooj ooo len E E vn iMi zl a SS SS SS EA AAA AAA AA SEA AAA AA SA DO 1000001 0100001 1100001 001000
95. lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below 1 2 3 2 CALCulate Subsystem Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm
96. m FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 187 Adjust Ref Lvl Power Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the set tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the description of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig nificantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 279 Ch Power ACLR Activates the Adjacent Channel Power measurement In this measurement the power of the carrier and its adjacent and alternate channels is determined Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 234 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 187 Bandclass Ch Power ACLR Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Opens a dialog box to select the bandclass The following band
97. marker with respect to marker 1 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 197 6 2 8 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements All Marker Off Switches all markers off lt also switches off all functions and displays that are associ ated with the markers delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 211 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Marker To menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit ii PIE Ant Seinielsv od eben E ei Wang tries 89 LEE 89 liil e a RR 89 Next Peak ec m EE 89 F PIGEL TS MOOS only ecce trt tr ete etie ratas 90 ETDPICHA BTS mode only cett tetro aaa e ic eee 90 PICH MS Mode ON 00 ir ia 90 Mi cial dde lid 90 DU o EedH 90 Next Min MOde RR 91 Center Mkr Freq span gt D 91 Select 1 2 3 4 A Selects the normal marker or the delta marker and activates the marker A stands for delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 217 Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace Remote command CALCula
98. model has a maximum frequency of 4 GHz e The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 1311 2015 xx is not available for the R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx models The maximum usable UO analysis bandwidth for these models is 28 MHz or with option R amp S FSV B70 40 MHz 2 Introduction Overview of Firmware Options R amp S FSV K82 and K83 This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K82 or K83 It covers operation via menus and the remote control commands for the CDMA2000 base station BTS or mobile station MS analyzer This part of the documentation consists of the following chapters chapter 3 Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Station Tests on page 11 Describes the measurement setup for base station or mobile station tests chapter 4 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 on page 13 Explains some basic 1xEV DO base station tests chapter 5 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option K83 on page 24 Explains some basic 1xEV DO mobile station tests chapter 6 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis on page 35 Describes the instrument functions of CDMA2000 Analysis chapter 7 Remote Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis on page 178 Describes all remote control commands defined for the code domain measure ment An alphabetic list of all remote control commands and a table of so
99. not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sample detector is used see chapter 6 4 3 Detector Overview on page 156 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 6 2 7 Softkeys of the Marker Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter
100. operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Marker Norm Delta on page 88 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command acti vates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix
101. page 238 Range Log 10 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Range Log 5 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Range Log 1 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Range Log Manual x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis man ually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238
102. peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Min on page 90 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode Manual operation See Marke
103. start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Manual operation See Start on page 129 7 6 2 5 SENSe Subsystem SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Stop on page 129 SENSe POWer subsystem SENSeJPOWer ACHapnel ACP ais ccc wie eat aan 273 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWiDt CH ANnel cchannelz l eene 274 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlDth ACHannel ene 274 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth AL Termate channelz nenene 275 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel esses 275 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil TerAlPHa Al Temate channelz 275 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil TerAl Pa CHAhnel channelz rnnr renren 276 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel essen 276 IGENZGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil Tel STATetAl Temate channel nee nennene 276 ISGENZGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil Te STATetcCHAhNnel channelz se ersrererererererersrees 276 SENSeTPOWer AOHapnel MODE evacrisa paid 277 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel nana nana nananananonnnnninns 277 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME
104. table and activates a prede fined channel table CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Channel Search Mode on page 66 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command queries the names of all the channel tables stored on the flash disk for the current application CDMA 1xEVDO Parameters lt sum of file sizes of all subsequent files gt lt spare storage space on hard disk gt 1st file name gt 1st file size 2nd file name gt 2nd file size nth file name nth file size Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Queries catalog Usage Query only Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Channel Tables on page 67 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment on the selected channel table Parameters Comment lt string gt comment on the channel table CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for NEW TAB Specifies Comment for NEW_TAB as comment Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt TargetFileName gt This command copi
105. the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 AU The dialog contains the following tabs Bandwidth on page 103 Spacing on page 104 Names on page 105 Weighting Filter on page 105 Limits on page 106 Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent chan nels TX is only available for the multi carrier ACLR measurement When you change the bandwidth for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all subse quent channels of the same type The transmission channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard see chap ter 6 4 14 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 175 Measurements in zero span see Fast ACLR On Off softkey are performed in the zero span mode The channel limits are indicated by vertical lines For measure ments requiring channel bandwidths deviating from those defined in the selected standard the IBW method is to be used With the IBW method see Fast ACLR On Off softkey the channel bandwidth limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of the channel center fre quency Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth Softkeys and Menus fo
106. the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix n irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 84 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated contin uous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all Manual operation See Continuous Sweep on page 84 See Single Sweep on page 84 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INIT ESP Starts a Spectru
107. the external gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 us SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 ys INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Gated Trigger On Off on page 125 See Gate Ranges on page 125 SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt DelayTime gt This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the contin uation of the sweep Note Using gate mode level see SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE on page 287 and an IFP trigger see TRIGger n SEQuence SOURce on page 309 the hold off time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements Parameters lt DelayTime gt Osto 30s RST Os Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth lt Timelnterval gt This command defines a gate length Parameters Timelnterval 125 ns to 30 s RST 400us Example SWE EGAT LENG 10ms SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Trigg
108. use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDP or CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDPR see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 2 Channel Table This result display shows all channels of the signal The sorting of the channels is according to channel type e special channels like F PICH F SYNC etc first then data channels CHAN and last inactive channels always shown as Within a group channels are sorted according to the spreading factor and then according to code number also in ascending order Within the code number first active then inac tive channels are listed The selected channel is marked in red Active and inactive data channels are defined via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 The Channel Table result display may contain up to 128 entries corresponding to the highest base spreading factor of 128 The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single PCG Channel Table 1 Clrw Channel Walsh SymRate RC Power Power T Offs P Offs IS Type Ch SF ksps dBm dB ns mrad Fig 6 3 Channel Table result display For the Code Domain Power measurement the following parameters are determined for the channels Parameter Description Channel Type Shows the channel type for inactive channels Walsh Chan SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Symb Rate ksps Symbol rate with
109. will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 288 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 288 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 288 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep ing e Sweep on page 140 e FFT on page 1
110. 0 0 dB IQ Capture Display Configuration Power Control Group O Screen A CDP Channel Number 0 Screen B Result Summary Code Order Hadamard Screen C Composite Const Code Power Relative Screen D Channel Table Power Reference Pilot Ch 7 o Time Phase Est Off Normalize Off a 1 Close Fig 6 15 Settings overview in CDMA2000 BTS mode K82 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Invert Q Off Capture Length 3 Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Set Count Bal Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Set To Analyze 0 Ref Level 1 24 51 dBm Trigger Source Free Run Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Polarity Positive Search Mode Auto Search Preamplifier Off Trigger Offset 0 0 s Inactive Threshold 40 0 dB Channel Base SF Display Long Code Configuration Base Spreading Factor 32 Power Control Group O Screen A CDP Long Code Mask Channel Number 0 Screen B Result Summary 0 Code Order Hadamard Screen C Composite Const Long Code Offset Code Power Relative Screen D Channel Table SD Pilot Power Absolute Long Code Mode Standard Power Reference Total Pwr Time Phase Est Off Fig 6 16 Settings overview in CDMA2000 MS mode K83 To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to change the focus to any other block or press one of the following buttons e Frontend Settings on page 61 IQ Capture Settings on page 63 Demod Settings BTS mode on page 70
111. 0000 1 O 000010 2 010001 O 1000 1100 0 1 0 100010 34 010010 O 10 0 14 00 0 0 1 D 010010 13 010011 0 1 O O 1 1f 1 1 O0 O 1 O 110010 so 01010 og 10 1 0 00 0 1 0 1 0 001010 10 010101 0 10 1 0D 11 0 1 0 1 0 101010 42 010110 0 101 1 00 1 1 0 1 0 011010 26 010111 OF 1 001 1 11 1 1 O 1 0 111010 58 011000 O 1 1 0 0 00 0 0 1 1 0 000110 6 011001 O 1 1 0 0 1f 1 00 1 1 0 100110 33 011010 0 1 1 0 14 00 1 0 1 14 0 010110 22 011011 D 1 1 001 141 10 1 1 0 110110 se 011100 0 1 1 1 0 00 0 1 1 1 0 001110 14 011101 D 1 1 1 0 if 10 1 1 14 14 0 101110 46 011110 OF 1 1 1 1 00 1 1 1 1 0 011110 30 011111 0 1 1 4 14 14f1 1 1 1 1 0 111110 62 100000 0 0000 1 000001 1 1000001f100 00 1 100001 33 1000014001000 1 010001 17 1 0 0 O 1 t1 0 O0 O 1 110001 49 1000100004 00 1 001001 9 10010 1710100 1 101001 100 4 14004 14 00 t 011001 25 100 1 1 if 1 1 1 O0 D 1 111001 s 1010 00 0 0010 1 000101 101001 1 0 1 0 0 1f10 0 10 1 10101 31 101010 1 0 1 0 1 00 1 0 1 D 1 010101 21 101011 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 D 1 110101 3 10110 10 1 1 0 00 D 1 10 1 001101 13 101101 1 0 1 10 1710 1 10 1 101101 4S 101110 1 0 1 1 1 U 1 1 1 0 1 011101 29 101111 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 111101 61 11000 0 0 0001 1 000011 3 1100001410004 1 100011 35 110010701001 1 010011 19 1100 1 1f 1 1 0 D 1 1 110011 51 11010 1 10 1 0 00 1 0 1 1 001011 11 110101 1 10 10 1710 10 1 1 101011 IN 110110 1 10 1 1 00 1 1 0 4 1 011011 21 110111 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 111011 59 1110 007 0 00111 0
112. 00111 T 11140 047100 141 1 100111 39 1110 1070 10 1 1 1 010111 23 1030 1 U 1 11 1 1 DU 1 1 T 110111 55 111100 1 11 1 0D OF OO O 1 1 1 1 001111 15 nud 070331383 10 17 4 3 1 101111 D 111110 1 1 1 1 1 nO 1 1d 1 1 i 011111 31 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 41 111111 63 Fig 10 1 Codetable for base spreading factor 64 ES A 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 3 35 36 37 38 39 4 42 43 ae as 45 il 45 49 so 51 2 53 se SS 56 Sr se sg 60 61 62 63 HO Kool mm0 0000011 000100 0000101 0000110 000111 mm1 001010 LED 1014 0001100 01101 001110 001111 0010000 0010001 0010010 0010011 0010100 0010101 010110 10111 0011000 Int 1001 0011010 0011011 0011100 0011101 0011110 011111 0100000 0100001 0100010 0100011 0100100 0100101 0100110 0100111 010101 0101010 0101014 0101100 0101101 0101110 D101111 0110000 0110001 0110010 0110011 0110100 0110101 0110110 0110111 0111000 0111001 0111010 0111011 0111100 0111101 0111110 0111111 ln os j a lk SS EA SEA ao ojo oao oj SS SS jo oo ojoo ojoo ooj ooa joo oojo oo ofj zk a jo oo ojo oo oj lt lt j jo oo ojo o o gj j joo ooj ooa jo oo oj jo o o of jo o o oj jo o o of jo o o oj jo o o oj jo o o oj jo ooo PR o oj o oj o of o
113. 1 1010001 0110001 4110001 000 1001 1001001 0101001 1101001 0011001 1011001 0111001 4111001 DO 1000101 0100101 1100101 0010101 1010101 0110101 1110101 001101 101101 0101101 1101101 0011101 1011101 0111101 1111101 riu 1000011 0100011 1100011 0010011 1010011 0110011 1110011 001011 1001011 0101011 1101011 0011011 1011011 0111011 1111011 0000111 1000111 0100111 1100111 0010111 1010111 0110111 1110111 Di 1001111 0101111 1101111 0011111 1011111 0111111 1111111 1 65 33 9T 17 31 49 113 9 73 H 105 25 39 s 121 5 69 3T 101 21 8S 53 111 13 TT 4s 109 29 33 61 125 3 67 35 ER 19 93 1 115 11 7s 43 107 21 31 E 123 T 71 39 103 23 ST ss 119 15 79 a 111 31 ER 53 121 Fig 10 3 Code table for base spreading factor 128 part 2 List of Commands SENSO JADJUStA LE eier Ed ee Rias 252 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HY ST eresis LOW 6 lis ici ii a 252 IGENZGe IAD Just COhNFouraton HG Teresie Uber 253 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation ertet re rnnt tee ee re te PR fene rrr eget 253 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE 5 5 12min aia n har tk caci n 253 SENSe ADJust FREQuency SENSe ADIJUSELEV Cli iio nar A edP ot do tp ge e teta SENSe AVERagesn COUN scat ioc eer ride tat SEENEN SENSe AVERagesn S TAT C Trace rn ttr rent rt terr tnit nre rerba Eaei SENS BAND width BVID VIDEO atise t
114. 11 128 4 15 128 4 17 128 4 25 128 4 Table 6 3 Base station test model for aggregate signal in radio configuration 4 TDC_RC4 Channel Type Number of Chan nels Code Channel Walsh Code SF Radio Configura tion F PICH 1 16 128 F SYNC 1 32 64 F PCH 1 64 CHAN 9 128 10 128 11 128 15 128 17 128 25 128 A A A A A LHL Table 6 4 Base station test model for aggregate signal in radio configuration 4 BPC_RC4 Channel Type Number of Chan nels Code Channel Walsh Code SF Radio Configura tion F PICH 1 0 64 F SYNC 1 16 128 32 64 F PCH 1 64 CHAN 9 128 10 128 11 128 15 128 17 128 25 128 A A A A A A Table 6 5 Channel table for enhanced access channel operation Further Information Channel type Code channel Walsh Code SF Mapping PICH 0 32 l EACH 2 8 Q Table 6 6 Channel table for reverse commom control channel operation Channel type Code channel Walsh Code SF Mapping PICH 0 32 l CCCH 2 8 Q Table 6 7 Channel table for REVERSE TRAFFIC CHANNEL OPERATION 3 Channel type Code channel Walsh Code SF Mapping PICH 0 32 l FCH 4 16 Q S1CH 2 4 Table 6 8 Channel table for REVERSE TRAFFIC CHANNEL OPERATION 5 Channel type Code channel Walsh Code SF Mapping PICH 0 32 l DCCH 8 16 l FCH 4 16 Q S1CH 2
115. 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done Close For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 301 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digi tal UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Mod ule Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Man ual Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 95 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the
116. 2 10 6 2 1 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Softkeys of the Marker To Menu iacens edidic ecd cu oda n aed 89 Softkeys of the Auto Set Men 91 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements eeren 93 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Code Domain Analyzer menu of the CDMA2000 Analysis options IONS OVE VIO e 59 Frontend Settings AA E 61 A encanta ead A 62 E Prequeney OSE s rene prt mbar prese kel De Epub ibi dia 62 B i o MEE 62 A A 63 L Preamp OMOR EE 63 Er E 63 jege mr uorm 63 leg EE 63 A MN 64 e MINNS 64 O A TT 64 L Trigger Source Free Run 64 Trigger Source EE 64 L Trigger O 64 e ONSE cei PE 65 Channel Table Sett ngs 1 eee iia 65 L Channel Search Mode 66 L Inactive Channel Theesen 66 L Chamel EE 67 L New Copy Edn tentent cn nono no nr netos 67 A E 69 ek 69 PS e EN AEAEE TE 69 Ee 69 e 69 dt o A AE E A 69 SA A n 70 Me PERT 70 L Restore Default Table cid 70 Demod Settings BTS mode 1 iie rancia ERR eaae FS 70 El 70 A A nese eee aes ca ass SENG doen aC 71 A dee 71 L Enhanced ALD ita 71 lu j 1 M 71 A o NR T 71 EE Eeer 72 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements L Cut 42 deet NE 72 L Antenna DN onana E E e
117. 21 E Jeri Ref Evi a 121 O PNEU E D 121 c3 121 Eed 121 L 4E of Sami ds 122 M EE 122 uc 1 1 EE 122 Kop ROME A f ete tieu en obese ns adi atinni dtu ined 122 L Range Log 100 Vll sisse ERR reri eai Hi 122 L Range Log DU PB dto eti eae teda lends 123 L Range 15 Rol MM 123 L Range Log SAB ses ios eoa d E atii c ndn 123 L Range bon d Bes tror tdi deque tudin 123 Ranas Log MARIA cviinicicicn iii ai 124 Be ee A A A 124 L Range UU in ai 124 Epia Mas Vale ad 124 Hl 1 1 T om 124 L y Unit e It 125 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 EUITIO aba 125 A tege uae inm ateietrdisom c edep eege 125 L Gated Trigger A 125 E A A MNCS nrme mre 125 Klek e phe tric IAEA EEI eM tek LE eR FREU RH P Per EUER 126 Code Domain Analyzer Starts the Code Domain Analyzer and opens the Code Domain Analyzer menu Select the desired result display via this menu For details refer to chapter 6 2 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu on page 58 For details on the measurements in the code domain initial configuration and screen layout refer to chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 35 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 234 Power Starts the Signal Channel Power measurement in which the power of a single channel is determined Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 234 CALCulate n MARKer
118. 40 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 Auto on page 141 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 289 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 289 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 289 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmwar
119. AEE EEEE 141 SOW PING RAMO 141 L REWIVBU Sine D EE 141 L RBW VBW Pulse 31 142 L RBW VBW Noise Olsson NEEN 142 L CAT ET 142 L Span RBW Auto Do 142 L SpamRBW Manuel ccrte trier ere laa 142 Bier or qe NEN ES 143 e S E Seaton ed 143 Res BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DNARROW key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the RBW display in the channel bar This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth ESolution AUTO on page 267 ESolution on page 266 J W Res BW Auto Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span for span gt 0 If you change the span the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth
120. Base SF Long Code MS mode on page 73 Channel Table Settings on page 65 Result Settings on page 74 Display Config on page 77 When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys press the ENTER key to open the cor responding dialog box The Settings Overview dialog box always remains open while settings are modified Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parame ters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier On e ott Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 fcenter fmax SPAN pin 2 Span 0 0 Hz lt foenter s fmax fmax and SPAN pin are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 270 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 G
121. Bm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 25 5 2 Measuring the Signal Channel Power e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer e The R amp S FSV must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the CDMA2000 specification for frequency measurements on base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e If the base station mobile station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base station mobile station to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presettings Enter the external attenuation Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency e Set the trigger e If used enable the external reference e Select the standard and the desired measurement e Set the PN offset Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the CDMA2000 signal is dis played The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermo dulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial
122. CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe State This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters State Example Manual operation CALCulate Subsystem ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS See Used Power Classes on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command sets the upper limit level for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always ends at 200 dBm i e the upper limit of the last power class can not be set If more than one power class is in use the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class Suffix lt n gt lt k gt lt Class gt Parameters lt Level gt Example Manual operation irrelevant irrelevant 1 4 the power class to be evaluated lt nu
123. CDMA J STD008 reverse CDMA J STD008 REV R19C RJO08 CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1 CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV RIS95c1 CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000 S2CD TD SCDMA forward TD SCDMA FWD FTCD TCDMa TD SCDMA reverse TD SCDMA REV RTCD WLAN 802 11A WLAN 802 11A AWLan WLAN 802 11B WLAN 802 11B BWLan WiMAX WiMAX WiMAX WIBRO WIBRO WIBRO GSM GSM GSM RFID 14443 RFID 14443 RFID14443 TETRA TETRA TETRA PDC PDC PDC PHS PHS PHS CDPD CDPD CDPD APCO 25 Phase 2 APCO 25 P2 PAPCo25 For the R amp S FSV the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission chan nel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This defini tion is also used for the R amp S FSV if the standards marked with an asterisk are selected 6 4 14 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters The Adjust Settings softkey see Adjust Settings on page 108 automatically optimi zes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration as described in the following mm ETUR TUE RUE REA AAA AAA AAA AN Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 175 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Frequency span
124. CENTer on page 270 CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 1096 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be set to a fraction of the span span gt 0 or a fraction of the resolu tion bandwidth span 0 or it can be set to a fixed value manually Apart from the Center Marker and Manual softkeys the other softkeys are dis played depending on the selected frequency span This softkey is available for RF measurements 0 1 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 96 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 271 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 0 1 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 96 of the resolution bandwidth This is the default setting Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 271 0 5 Span span 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step si
125. E nitri re rettet enn res CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class COUNt sese CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATEe ax CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum eese CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MlNimum essent CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive eene CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore CAL Culatesn bIMitsk s ESPectr m VAL UG usina ar es Herpes E 206 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AQF Fe E 211 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUIt esses 184 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer CALGCulatesn MARKer mP FUNCGCtion PIGLEL cios cuota rrt p prier ete cp te pecca deep CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE nennen rennes nnns entren entren 187 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ nnne 188 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzEUNGCion ber GEI ect CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion Dich CAL Gulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimuM LEF T ocurreret ea ertet atari CAL Culate n MARKer m MAXimu rm NEXT ioco beo ke a Gane nines CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
126. EL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 195 CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarkerem gt MINimum NEXT esee nnns nannte nins 196 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cesses 196 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 196 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarkerem gt STA Tel enne ennt nnn neret 197 e e E RI Eat E EN 197 GALOCulate n DELTamarkersmi X cuiii eene tace apa nne nane a andan nenas narnia naaa Ee 198 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative seen ennt ennt 198 ee IER BEE E EE 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint X Reference This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt Reference gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer ence For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the verti
127. EN 38 e Channel Tablet ed is 40 POWECT VS PG Goons a dad Eloisa 41 LE sug AME 42 Code Domain Emor POWER s ico tte aar e e da a 44 e Composite EVM RM iiie teieiti aca 45 e Peak Code Domain WEE 46 e Channel Constellation ei ei s ei e t e deed oa 47 e EVM VS SYMBOL cono Enea 48 e Composite ConstellationN ooononncnccnonononeneninnnninenenonecononinononnrrannnnnnnanannnanans 49 e Powervs SymbOl EE 50 e Channel Bis AM iie to tI se ctu ave e a dada 50 Mag Emon vs Ghi DE 52 e Phase EMP VS E 52 e SymbolMaghitude TT 53 e Symbol Phase JEFITO oce et nri i ree HE ii 54 6 1 3 1 Code Domain Power This result display determines the power of all channels and plots it in a diagram The x axis represents the channel code number which corresponds to the base spread ing factor Each bar in the diagram represents one code The order of the codes depends on the Code Order on page 76 The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the power of each channel The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single PCG It supports both Hada mard and BitReverse code sorting order MS mode the power is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Code Domain Power 1 Clrw Start Ch O 4 Code Stop Ch 63 Fig 6 1 Code Domain Power Result Display in Hadamard code sorting order Code Domain Power 61 Clrw Start Ch O 4 Code
128. ENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual on page 280 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 279 Spacing Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define the channel spacings for the TX channels and for the adjacent channels e TXchannels left column TX1 2 spacing between the first and the second carrier TX2 3 spacing between the second and the third carrier The spacings between all adjacent TX channels can be defined separately When you change the spacing for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all sub sequent TX channels in order to set up a system with equal TX channel spacing quickly For different spacings a setup from top to bottom is necessary If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution according to the center frequency is as follows Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre quency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency Adjacent channels right column Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other the modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same facto
129. ER 282 SENSe POWer TRACe SENSE SWEEP COUN E SENSe SWEep EGA Te ont tren A A cr e rae ecc ER de rev n E epa SENSe SWEep EGATe HOL Bof nro a na SENSE SWEEP ENK E EE SENSe SWEep EGATe POkLatrily repr err rrt rena nere nite de EE E Ee paa SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURCGSe EE SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP range sese ennemi rennen nnne 287 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACexk COMMMBnt 2 nr ene cin cc 286 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRAGexk S TARt rangge ieun eon terne parere teta tta pro denas 286 IGENZGe GwWEepnEGATfe RACecklGiAfecrangezl nennen nennen 287 SENSe SWEep EGA Te TYPE ET 287 SENSE a e P 288 EI EEN 288 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed S TATe sese 192 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz FUNGC onPhNOise AUTO 193 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe seen 193 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt LINK acacia a pd ees apu Roe CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MAXimum EFT ciue cs cdas CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MA Nimum RIGH tssiri ai 195 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK esses nnne iaa 195 CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MihNimum LEET 195 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A 196 CALCulate
130. FF RST OFF Example ESP RANG3 INP GAIN STATe ON Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off Manual operation See Preamp on page 113 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert Mode This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range The range num bers are updated accordingly Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Mode AFTer BEFore SENSe Subsystem Example ESP RANG3 INS BEF Inserts a new range before range 3 ESP RANG1 INS AFT Inserts a new range after range 1 Manual operation See Insert before Range on page 114 See Insert after Range on page 114 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt Level This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Level 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STAR 10 Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the range Manual operation See Abs Limit Start on page 113 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP Level This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range
131. FILTer STATe ACHannel erret ern rennen n nnns SENSe POWer ACHamnel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt chamnel gt SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel channel essent SENSe POWer AGblanneb MODE E SENSe POWer ACHanneE NAME ACElarnrel cinere prr ten reet reni net SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt channel gt SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channels essent rennen nennen SENSe POWer ACHhannelL PRESeL nett ether rete n ecc a rre rev E Ren exa SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESStRLEWVel uniia tti cr rr int ae cid SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONGQE eese eere rn nennt tanta tatnen anna SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO essen nennen SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUal esee 280 SENSe POWer ACHamnel SPACing ALTernate lt chamnel gt 281 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel essent enne 281 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel nennen 280 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COU NL rapporte pet rer tet re repere ee 281 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth 1 ehe entr critt reuera trier rne 282 SENSE e gut M 282 SENSe POWer NCORT6GCHOR rero reo rne nenne rere ni tr rr ce een e aed e Le e D
132. File contents Description RefType CPOWER reference range setup for details see Edit TxBandwidth 9540000 Hz Reference Range on page 115 Filter State ON Alpha 0 22 PeaksPerRange 1 evaluation list information Values 4 0 22500000 9270000 1000000 2986455000 74 762840 information about each peak 270996094 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS 1 9270000 4770000 100000 2991405000 100 1769561 7675781 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS 3 4770000 9270000 100000 3005445000 100 17695617 range number gt start frequency stop frequency resolution bandwidth of range frequency of peak 675781 absolute power in dBm of peak gt 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS relative power in dBc of peak 4 9270000 22500000 1000000 3018225000 74 7628402 related to the channel power gt 70996094 lt distance to the limit line in dB 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS positive value means above the limit limit fail pass 0 fail 21 6 4 9 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of the XML standard Below the child nodes attributes and structure defined for the data import is described Build your own XML files according to these conventions because the R amp S FSV can only interpret XML files of a known structure For example f
133. Hz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 272 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 239 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 240 Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 306 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current me
134. IDth VIDeo AUTO on page 269 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 268 Video BW Auto Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected reso lution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the lon ger settling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 269 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors
135. IQ SRATe on page 304 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 303 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 303 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 303 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes e Device identification Used port R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output transfer rates e Status of the connection protocol Status of the PRBS descewing test Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out A Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate
136. Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level numeric value Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 94 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 94 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed Other Commands Referenced in this Manual For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Level Unit on page 94 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 94 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode
137. Kxx Models e To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Selectthe suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window P Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx models should consider the following differences to the description of the newer R amp S FSV 1321 3008Kxx models e Functions that are based on the Windows operating system e g printing or set ting up networks may have a slightly different appearance or require different set tings on the Windows XP based models For such functions refer to the Windows documentation or the documentation originally provided with the R amp S FSV instru ment e The R amp S FSV 1307 9002K03 model is restricted to a maximum frequency of 3 GHz whereas the 1321 3008K04
138. L 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale Manual operation See Range Log 100 dB on page 122 See Range Log 50 dB on page 123 See Range Log 10 dB on page 123 See Range Log 5 dB on page 123 See Range Log 1 dB on page 123 See Range Log Manual on page 124 See Range Linear on page 124 See Range Lin Unit on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant INSTrument Subsystem t irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Y Axis Maximum on page 81 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This com
139. LC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the lt UpperLimit gt upper alternate adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate Subsystem CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent chan nel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is th
140. LEVel DURation MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSV determines the length of the measure ment that is performed while determining the ideal reference level Parameters Mode AUTO Automatically determines the measurement length MANual Manual definition of the measurement length RST AUTO 7 6 2 2 SENSe Subsystem Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR MODE MAN Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Specifies the duration manually SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by determining the highest level in the frequency span Example ADJ FREQ Manual operation See Auto Freq on page 92 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Example ADJ LEV Manual operation See Adjust Ref Lvl on page 63 See Auto Level on page 92 SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem The SENSe ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands to configure Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurements The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on going sweep operation SENSe JES
141. LTer COFRequency essere nnne 232 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF eene nene eintreten tiit inna CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILT er TYPE rueiros tarnen nn tnnt rn toan enhn ea pen GONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrieriMALEGO notieren rr ern eee nnn tnr eR CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASUurement 25 5 ettet hn aia DIAGnostic n SERVICO NSQUICO cisnes da DISPlay MTABle oi A A a ve re x E n ya DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE DISPlayEWINDOW lt N gt SS ELECE E DISPlayEWINDowsri7 STAT ertt ati DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGCe xt de RT DISPlay WINDowsn TRACES X Te DEE DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt d Re D DlSblavf WiNDow nz TRA ect VT SCAL et DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum esee eere DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essent nnne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision essent enne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel esee ennemi DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sess 240 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue DISPlay WINDowsn TRACe lt t gt S l ATe etuer ias FORMatDEXPort DSEP AO T
142. LTernate lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan nels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adja cent channel is changed e g channel 3 the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate adjacent channels e g 4 11 is automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ALT2 30 kHz Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 103 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate cha
143. Mit source RELative STARt eese 263 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LlIMit source RELative STOP suus 263 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source STATe eene 263 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel sse nennen nene 264 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME 264 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO 265 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSdQUcer sss 265 SENSe ESPectrumiRBRANGe 22 cures apuuu nc eant dei epar nt E RER nene abge ken ce bau ein pacas 266 SENSe ESPeocirum RTYBe nirn ede cocina e oe Feed eve ANERER EEN 266 SENSe ESPectrum BWID Bandwidth This command defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power refer ence range This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power refer ence type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 266 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt minimum span lt value lt span of reference range RST 3 84 MHz Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP BWID 1 MHZ Sets the Tx bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 115 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe State This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter This setting only takes effect if channel power is selected as power referenc
144. N Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE Mode This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measure ment The command is only available with span gt O and if the number of adjacent channels is greater than 0 For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured channel power using the command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative ABSolute absolute adjacent channel measurement RELative relative adjacent channel measurement RST RELative Example POW ACH MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative Manual operation See ACLR Abs Rel on page 108 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel Name This command defines a name for the adjacent channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Parameters Name RST Adj Example POW ACH NAME ACH XYZ Defines the name of the adjacent channel as XYZ Manual operation See Names on page 105 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt channel gt Name This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel The name is dis played in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Name RST ALT lt 1 11 gt Example
145. O as reference impedance for the measured levels Default setting is 50 Q The setting 75 Q should be selected if the 50 O input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75 0 50 Q All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instru ment 50 Q This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 306 6 3 5 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is pro vided in the corresponding softkey description For Spurious Emission Measurements the settings are defined in the Sweep List dia log see the description in the base unit Res BW EU TH EM 138 PRES BW o MH 138 Video BW Manual Tm 138 MISIVA A A A NA ASS 139 swesptime Manual ua 139 e PUM EO m 140 VESTIDO EM 140 o O A 140 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 D RTT e RINT REST 140 A EE 141 L FFT Filter Mode 141 eege 141 E Ee A EREE rE Re CRT OnE EEE
146. OFF CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta mark ers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix n Selects the measurement window m 1 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON Manual operation See Link Mkr1 and Delta1 on page 149 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next
147. P ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trace number on which the CP ACLR measure ment is to be performed Only activated traces can be selected For details on trace modes see chapter 6 4 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 157 Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 283 ACLR Abs Rel CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Switches between absolute and relative power measurement in the adjacent channels Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dByV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 277 Adjust Settings CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 6 4 14 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Param eters on page 175 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 278 Sweep Time Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time With the RMS detector a longer Swe
148. POW ACH NAME ALT3 XYZ Defines the name of the third alternate channel as XYZ Manual operation See Names on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channel Name This command defines a name for the specified TX channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 12 the TX channel Parameters Name RST TX lt 1 12 gt Example POW ACH NAME CHAN3 XYZ Defines the name of the third transmission channel as XYZ Manual operation See Names on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Setting This command adjusts the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the number of channels the channel bandwidths and the chan nel spacings selected in the active power measurement If necessary adjacent chan nel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment To obtain correct results a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode The result is queried with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Parameters Setting ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO SENSe Subsystem Example POW ACH PRES ACP Sets the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the ACLR measurement INIT CONT OFF Switches ove
149. PRESSetSTORS notre t ere re pee eir erp per cts Ra Fra eee ga praed e EE Rupe SENSe ESPectrum PRESetQU S T ANdard 5 eter ek hd A OR ecu SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo sees SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution eg SENSe ESPectrum RANGexrange COUINL onion rrt trottoir ive HER RR E EE LENS SENSe ESPectrum RANGexsr ngez DELelt eoe rrr peni roter P ERES EEEO ENEAN SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILT Or TYPE ertt n treni tps SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation essent SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO seen SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe essent nennt nennen SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source ABSolute S ARI 262 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source ABSolute STOP see 262 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source RELative STARIt essen 263 IGENZGe EGbechumRANGe zangez UMit zsourcez RE ative GTOP cnn ncnnna canci n 263 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMitesource gt STATE nennen enne 263 SENSe ESPectrum RANGexrange RLEEVel raten tior ra tiet tiae nona t e adn SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO 265 SENSe ESPec
150. Pectrum BWID 0 ii tutt hb teat oe eoa d d e Read nna 255 SENSe ESPectrum FIL Ter RRO STATE nrs i Lace na ERR iln e 255 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHA eniin terrere hann h nnn an aae 256 IGENGeJECGbechum HiobGbeed enne nnne nenne rere rrr nn nnns 256 SENSe ESPectrum PRESetESTANdard 21 ated tradet a onte vene 257 SENSe ESPeciramPRESeEbRESTOte uci cocina eere center Lai Teir EY 257 SENSeJ1ESPectrumiPRESeE S TORO getest traer iia 257 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution esses 257 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo cessere 258 IGENGelECGbechum RANGe zangez OUNEN 258 IGENGeJCGbechum RANGe zange D I ete enne 258 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FlLTer TYPE ener 259 IGENZGeJCGbechum RANGe zange tFbREOuencvl START 259 IGENZGelCGbechum RANGe zange tEbREOuencvl GTOb nenene nenne eeeerrerererseee 260 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut AT Tenuation cccceceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeneneees 260 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUT O cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 261 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPutiGAIN STA T l nnne 261 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSE enne 261 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LlIMit source ABSolute STARt esses 262 IGENZGelCzbechum RANGe zangez LlMitzsourcezADBGolute GTOb 262 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range LI
151. Power BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 232 Antenna Diversity Demod Settings BTS mode Activates or deactivates the orthogonal transmit diversity two antenna system and defines the antenna for which the results are displayed Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Antenna 1 The signal of antenna 1 is fed in The pilot channel F PICH with channel number 0 and spreading fac tor 64 0 64 is required If a channel table is used in the measurement see Channel Table it must contain the pilot channel F PICH but must not contain the transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH As reference for the code power Power Reference PICH is used Antenna 2 The signal of antenna 2 is fed in The transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH with channel number 16 and spreading factor 128 16 128 is required If a channel table is used in the measurement see Channel Table it must contain the transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH but must not contain the pilot channel F PICH As reference for the code power Power Reference F TDPICH is used Off The aggregate signal from both antennas is fed in The pilot channels of both antennas are required If a channel table is used in the measurement see Channel Table it must contain both the transmit diversity pilot channel F TDPICH and the pilot channel F PICH As reference for the code power Power Reference F PICH is used Remote command
152. Power The command returns four values for each channel code class code number gt error power power ID Value Description Range Unit code class code class of the channel 2 7 2 corresponds to the lowest spreading factor 4 symbol rate 307 2 ksps 7 corresponds to the highest spreading factor 128 symbol rate 9 6 ksps lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 127 TRACe Subsystem Value Description Range Unit signal level error power La ch dB power ID power detection 0 inactive channel 1 power of own antenna 2 alias power of own antenna 3 alias power of other antenna 4 alias power of own and other antenna Note To avoid alias power set the base spreading factor correctly The number of displayed data depends on the spreading factor In addition the struc ture of the output differs whether Hadamard or BitReverse code sorting order was selected In Hadamard order the different codes are output in ascending order In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another Because an error power is output with the code domain error power a consolidation of the power values is not sensible For further information refer to Base Spreading Factor on page 70 and Code Order on page 76 Channel Table TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 parameter The command returns 8 values for each chan
153. R amp S FSV K82 K83 CDMA2000 Analysis Operating Manual IQ capturing 1176 7626 02 04 Test amp Measurement Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options e R amp S FSV K82 1310 8703 02 e R amp S FSV K83 1310 8755 02 This manual describes the following R amp S9FSV models with firmware version 2 30 and higher e R amp S FSV 4 1321 3008K04 e R amp S FSV 7 1321 3008K07 e R amp S FSV 13 1321 3008K13 e R amp S FSV 30 1321 3008K30 e R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K39 e R amp S9FSV 40 1321 3008K40 It also applies to the following R amp S9FSV models However note the differences described in chapter 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models on page 9 e R amp S FSV 3 1307 9002K03 e R amp S FSV 7 1307 9002K07 e R amp S FSV 13 1307 9002K13 e R amp S FSV 30 1307 9002K30 e R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K39 e R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing O 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www roh
154. Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 001 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 269 Span RBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 268 Default Coupling Coupling Ratio Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 267 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 269 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 288 Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type This softkey and its submenu are available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Instead of opening a submenu this softkey opens the Sweep List dialog box to select the filter type when measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The submenu contains the following softkeys e Normal 3 dB e CISPR 6 dB MIL Std 6 dB Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel e RRC e 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT For d
155. Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 49 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 11 Power vs Symbol This result display calculates the absolute power in dBm for every symbol number The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single PCG You can select a specific channel and PCG with the Select on page 79 softkey Power vs Symbol e 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 32 Sym Stop Sym 383 Fig 6 13 Power vs Symbol result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSYmbol see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 12 Channel Bitstream The result display provides information on the demodulated bits All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid by means of dashes For 16QAM modu lation is displayed for 8PSK modulation for QPSK and for BPSK The measurement evalua
156. S MINIMUM NEE Z Zoom fotum 87 158
157. STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 125 SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt State This command activates or deactivates tracing for a specific range using gated trigger ing Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1 3 range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 125 SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE Type This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values can be defined see SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f on page 285 Parameters Type LEVel EDGE LEVel The gate is level triggered After detection of the gate signal the gate remains open until the gate signal disappears The gate opening time cannot be defined with the command SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff Note Using gating with gate mode level and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 309 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements EDGE The gate is edge triggered After detection of the set gate signal edge the gate remains open until the gate delay SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLD
158. STem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Grid Abs Rel on page 136 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix n irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value the unit depends on the result display RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units for example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display Mode CDMA BT EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset DISPlay Subsystem Suffix n irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 62 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t
159. Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 6 2 10 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements on page 93 Input AOIDG EE 150 Noise SOEGB eiit claras 150 VICO BuU 150 PONI ao dl 150 e O O 150 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 301 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 310 Video Output Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID SeeOUTPut IF SOURce on page 313 Power Sensor For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B5 The Power Sensor Support firmware option R amp S FSV K9 provides the power measurement functions for this test setup
160. TA lt ResultType gt This command reads trace data from the R amp S FSV For details on reading trace data for other than code domain measurements refer to the TRACe DATA command in the base unit description Suffix n 1 44 irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACEA CTABle TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Reads out the trace data of measurement window 1 to 4 CTABle For the Channel Table result display reads out the maximum values of the timing phase offset between every assigned chan nel and the pilot channel see also SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 251 command Return values Return values The measurement results are explained separately for each measurement and illustrated by a short example at the end of this command description Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Channel Table Result Summary Power vs PCG Peak Code Domain Error Composite EVM EVM vs Symbol Channel Constellation Composite Constellation Channel Bitstream Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode CDMA Manual operation See List Evaluation On Off on page 116 Code Domain Power The command returns four values for each channel code class code numbers signal level power ID TRACe Subsystem Value Description Range Unit code class code class of the channel 2 7 2 corresponds to the lowest spreading factor 4 symbol rate 307 2 ksps 7 co
161. The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea surement margin of approx 10 96 If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adja cent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are avail able per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consid eration when selecting the frequency span For channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency span as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmis sion channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency span as a function of the number of transmission channels the trans mission channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT 1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x adja cent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth e Resolution bandwidth RBW To ensure both acceptable measurement spee
162. The reference power is the total power of the signal referred per PCG to the corresponding PCG RST PICH For further information refer to Power Reference on page 76 Example CDP PREF TOT Sets total power as reference power Mode CDMA Manual operation See Power Reference on page 76 SENSe CDPower QINVert State This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Invert Q on page 63 SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower SBANd lt NORMal INVers gt This command is used to swap the left and right sideband Parameters lt NORMal INVers gt RST NORM Example CDP SBAN INV Switches the right and left sideband Mode CDMA EVDO TDS SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NoOfSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Set Count on page 64 for more information Parameters lt NoOfSets gt Range 1 to TDS 99 CDMA 490 Increment 1 RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 12 Sets the number of sets to 12 Mode TDS Manual operation See Set Count on page 64 SENSe CDPower SET lt SetNo gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis The number of sets has to be defined with the SENSe CDPower SET command before using this command Parameters lt SetNo gt Range O to SET COUNT 1
163. WEep TIME is used auto matic coupling is switched off 7 6 2 7 SENSe Subsystem Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time Manual operation See Sweeptime Manual on page 130 See Sweeptime Auto on page 140 See Default Coupling on page 143 SENSe SWEep TYPE Type This command selects the sweep type Parameters Type SWE Selects analog frequency sweeps AUTO Automatically selects the sweep type FFT or analog frequency sweep FFT Selects FFT sweeps RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps Manual operation See Sweep on page 140 See FFT on page 140 See Auto on page 141 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of meas urements sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode This command has the same effect as the SENSe source SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements appl
164. ables with the same name as default channel tables are replaced by this action In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Demod Settings BTS mode This softkey opens the Demodulation Settings dialog box Common Settings 128 Base Spreading Factor PN Offset only for external trigger Multi Carrier Settings Multi Carrier On e ott Enhanced Algorithm C on 8 off Multi Carrier Filter C on off Filter Type Lowpass RRC Roll Off Factor 0 02 1 25 MHz Cut Off Frequency Antenna Settings Antenna Diversity e ott Antenna 1 Antenna 2 Base Spreading Factor Demod Settings BTS mode Sets the base spreading factor to either 64 or 128 If you set the base spreading factor to 64 for channels with a base spreading factor of 128 code class 7 an alias power is displayed in the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power diagrams Remote command SENSe CDPower SFACtor on page 250 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements PN Offset Demod Settings BTS mode Specifies the Pseudo Noise PN offset of the base station In a CDMA2000 system the PN offset is used to distinguish the base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multipls of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Although the parameter is always available it has an effect only in External trigger
165. am K82 sss 50 Channel Constellation K82 2s 47 Channel Table K82 40 Code Domain Error Power K82 244 Code Domain Power K82 seseeseses 38 Composite Constellation K82 ss 49 Composite EVM K82 we 45 EVM vs Symbol K82 2 48 A ee un Peak Code Domain Error 2 46 Power vs PCG KB82 cia cape ttes 41 Power vs Symbol K82 sss 50 Result Summary K82 2 n 42 Result Settings cp M 74 Result Summary cp 42 RF Preamplifier B22 icii deett 63 82 134 RMS MBM siete dto erede 139 157 RMS deteclor A rotor cds e 156 Roll off factor p M 72 RRC Filter KO ESS 71 RX Settings eji 96 S Sample detector conocida 156 ll Ei le 122 Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 304 Digital IQ ies ads 94 Save Channel Table RB 69 ih P 81 scaling E M 136 x and y axis signal statistic ssss 122 SCPI Conformity information sico tnn 179 search MINIMUM E 90 A mr 89 Select CH PCG V 79 sensitivity APD measurement c cccccnncooocccnccnnoononccncnccnannnnnnns 125 126 CCDF measure
166. ample CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500 Manual operation See of Samples on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement The following values are set x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Suffix n irrelevant Example CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions Manual operation See Default Settings on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt lt ResultType gt This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt Trace gt 1 6 trace Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN PEAK CFACtor ALL MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt The required result is selected via the following parameters Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dB
167. an be defined or existing channel tables can be modified The following channel tables are available by default RECENT Contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Predefined BPC RCA Channel tables for BTS mode K82 configured according to a spe MPC RC1 cific standard MPC RCA TDC_RC4 EACHOP Channel tables for MS mode K83 configured according to a specific RCCCHOP standard RTCHOP3 RTCHOPS5 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 227 New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings All three softkeys open a dialog box with the same layout and the same corresponding submenu The New softkey opens the New Channel Table dialog box In this dialog you can build a new channel table All fields are empty The Copy softkey copies all elements of the selected channel table and opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box The name of the new channel table is set to Copy of lt SourceChannelTableName gt The Edit softkey opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding menu In this dialog box you can edit an existing channel table Note that changes are never saved automatically Save your channel tables before ending the application Save softkey For more information see chapter 6 4 2 Work ing with Channel Tables on page 155 The dialog box contains the following items You can modify the white fields as you like The grey fields
168. and trace averaging see chapter 6 4 14 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Param eters on page 175 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 278 CCDF Starts the measurement of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function and the Crest factor Also opens the CCDF submenu containing the following softkeys Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 234 Res BW CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal amplitude correctly In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 MHz The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 266 of Samples CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples on page 220 Scaling CCDF Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x and y axis x Axis Ref Level Scaling
169. ange DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 238 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Range Log Manual Range Opens an edit dialog box to de
170. annels by means of the root mean square for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a dia gram in which the x axis represents the examined PCGs and the y axis shows the EVM values Test Setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cables with N connectors Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV L to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors Connect external triggering of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE to the signal genera tor s trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard CDMA2000 Link direction Uplink Procedure Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key Activate the CDMA2000 MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 MS Analysis Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey Start the measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A C Select the Composite EVM measurement Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings
171. ant Parameters Size SMALI LARGe RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Maximizes the second measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SSELect This command selects which window screen is active Suffix n 1 4 window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters RST 1 Example DISP WIND1 SSEL Sets the window 1 active Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe State Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP WIND3 STAT ON Turns on a third measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe DISPlay Subsystem The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It should be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n window For ap
172. apted values In the following examples adjusting the settings of the code domain measurements is o described using the dialog boxes Alternatively most of the settings can also be modi fied by using the corresponding hardkeys as in the base unit e g the center frequency can be either set in the Frontend Settings dialog box or via the FREQ key Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connec tors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard CDMA2000 Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 BS Analysis Mode Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error a Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BS Analysis 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Fr
173. are accessed via the CDMA2000 menu or the MEAS key e JDisplav GQolCSpL coser laxe et neon Feet abs tede eurer ra e taa e edd 36 e Configuring the Display meist rero sett iae uote eR u Ea 37 e Code Domain Analysis Results 38 e RFMeasuretrierb Sesulls iere en eere nee te b Re d emer e xe dus 54 6 1 1 O Measurements and Result Displays Display Concept Measurement results The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily The current configura tion of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is dis played in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations The available measurement results are described in the following sections All results are calculated from the same dataset of the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode Measurement settings The most important measurement settings are displayed in the diagram header For Code Domain Analyzer measurements the following settings are shown Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 3 5 GHz Channel 0 64 Power Ref Rel to Pilot Att 10 dB PCG 0of3 SymbRate 19 ksps Label Description Ref level Reference level defi
174. arks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an active list evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow on page 223 Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box to save the result in ASCII format to a specified file and directory For further details refer also to the ASCII File Export soft key ASCII File Export on page 116 Remote command MMEMor y STORe lt n gt LIST on page 312 ASCII File Export Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emis sion Mask Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the marker data For details on an ASCII file see chapter 6 4 7 ASCII File Export Format on page 161 This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator for the data import Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is there fore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using the Decim Sep softkey see Decim Sep on page 117 An example of an output file for Spectrum Emission Ma
175. ast SEM mode is available If this mode is activated several con secutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally which makes the measurement considerably more efficient The displayed results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges Thus measurement settings that apply only to the results such as limits or transducer factors can nevertheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps e The following sweep settings are identical Filter Type see Filter Type on page 112 RBW see RBW on page 112 VBW see VBW on page 112 Sweep Time Mode see Sweep Time Mode on page 112 Ref Level see Ref Level on page 112 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 172 Further Information Rf Att Mode see RF Att Mode on page 112 RF Attenuator see RF Att Mode on page 112 Preamp see Preamp on page 113 Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see Fast SEM on page 111 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list In the provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Fast SEM mode is activated by default SCPI command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Consequences Wh
176. asurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 254 IQ Capture Settings This softkey opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Common Settings Invert Q On e off Data Capture Settings Capture Length Set Count Set To Analyze Trigger Settings Trigger Source External 6 Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive C Negative Trigger Offset 0 0 s Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 249 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Sets the number of PCGs you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the PCGs The maximum capture length is 64 The Capture Length field is available if Set Count equals 1 The default value is 3 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 245 Set Count IQ Capture Settings Defines the number of consecutive sets to be stored in the instrument s IQ memory One set consists of 64 PCGs The R amp S FSV can capture up to 31360 PCGs about 26 seconds in a single sweep i e the possible value range is from 1 to 490 sets The default setting is 1 In that case you can still define the number of PCGs see Capture Length on page 64 In case you want to capture more than one set the cap ture length is always 64 The R amp
177. ated mark ers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display using the Marker Norm Delta softkey If marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey switches on an additional delta marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 217 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 197 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 198 T More Markers Opens a sub menu to select one of up to 16 available markers See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 Marker Norm Delta Changes the active marker to a normal norm or delta marker with respect to marker 1 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 197 Marker to Trace Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be placed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 215 All Marker Off Switches all markers off lt also switches off all functions and displays that are associ ated with the markers delta markers R
178. ation UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 179 Notation WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is inde pendent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which
179. ation for frequency measurements on base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e If the base station mobile station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base station mobile station to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presettings Enter the external attenuation e Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency e Set the trigger e If used enable the external reference e Select the standard and the desired measurement e Set the PN offset Test Setup for Base Station Tests 4 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 This section explains basic CDMA2000 base station tests by means of a setup with a signal generator e g an R amp S SMU It describes how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings The measurements are performed with an R amp S FSV equipped with the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 The following measurements are described e chapter 4 2 Measuring the Signal Channel Power on page 15 e chapter 4 3 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 15 e chapter 4 4 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error on page 17 chapter 4 5 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power on page 19 e chapter 4 6 Measuring the Composite EVM on page 20 e chapter 4 7 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the
180. ay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION eee 239 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelRLEVel eene 239 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeeeesessssssss 240 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition sse 240 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue cesses nnn 241 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing esses ener rere 241 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXIMUM coococccccccccccnncononinnonononanannnnna nana 241 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelMlNimum enne 242 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Marker table is displayed OFF Marker table is not displayed AUTO Marker table is only displayed if 2 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example To activate the table display DISP MTAB ON To query the current state of the marker table display DISP MTAB Manual operation See Marker Table on page 148 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command enlargens the measurement window indicated by the suffix to full screen The result display of the screen is by default the same as that of the first mea surement screen DISPlay Subsystem Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelev
181. between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 221 6 3 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 COMOT E 127 tee EE 127 Bing o AA advan A E 127 A EE 128 L 0 5 Span Span gt Desi an 128 E B PE span gt ci 128 a EE 128 L NEE 128 Ee 128 A A Oo 129 B NETT 129 cc m R R A 129 colo MM 129 Fregtenty Eege aai an 129 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 lt fcenter n fmax Sei SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter E fmax fmax and span in are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency
182. ble in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurements For RF measurements the softkeys are described in chapter 6 3 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 on page 97 The Lines menu is not available in the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode The Span menu is not available for code domain measurements and signal power measurements The Bandwidth menu is not available for code domain measurements measure ments All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there Importing and Exporting UO Data As of firmware version 1 60 UO data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K82 K83 and captured UO data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further infor mation refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 6 2 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Men 58 6 2 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu 80 6 2 3 Softkeys of the Amplitude Men 81 6 2 4 Softkeys of the Sweep Men 84 6 2 5 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA measurements sss 85 6 2 6 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurement ccccccceceeecceeeessteeeeeesssneeeeesees 86 6 2 7 Softkeys of the Marker Menu for CDA Measurements sss 88 6 2 8 6 2 9 6
183. ble within the application Possible reasons Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly set level Incorrectly set PN Offset Incorrectly set values for Swap IQ Invalid signal at input 2to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always O Glossary For a more comprehensive glossary refer to the CDMA2000 standard CDEP APICH auxiliary pilot channel ATDPCH auxiliary transmit diversity pilot channel BCH broadcast channel CACH common assignment channel CCCH common control channel code domain error power CDP code domain power Composite EVM in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications determines the square root of the squared error between the real and the imaginary parts of the test signal and an ideally generated reference signal EVM referred to the total signal in a composite EVM measurement CPCCH common power control channel Crest factor ratio of peak to average value of the signal Inactive Channel Threshold minimum power that a single channel must have compared with the total signal to be recognized as an active channel MC1 multi carrier1 one carrier system 1X MC2 multi carrier3 three carrier system 3X OTD orthogonal transmit diversity two antennas used PCG power control group name in CDMA2000 system for 1536 chips or 1 25 ms interval transmitter power is constant during a power control gro
184. cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 e Link direction Uplink Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and activate the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option 3 Start the Power measurement Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask a Press the MEAS key b Press the Power softkey 4 Setthe center frequency to 833 49 MHz 5 Setthe reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm On the screen the spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed In the table below the diagram the numeric values of the channel bandwidth of the TX Channel and power level of the analyzed signal are listed 5 3 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products the R amp S FSV offers a spectrum emission mask measurement The measurement com pares the power against the spectrum emission mask in the range from 4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier The exact measurement settings like the filter that is used depend on the Band Class parameter For a list of supported bandclasses refer to the Bandclass softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask menu Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal gene
185. cal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe State This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The reference point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta
186. can not be modified these are automatically calculated by the R amp S FSV Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table which will be saved under lt name gt xml The name is case sensitive and may not contain spaces It must be a valid MS Windows file name Note that the old channel table file is not deleted Description Enter further information about the channel table Channel Type Select one of the channel types from the dropdown menu Walsh Ch SF Symbol Rate ksps Enter the Channel Number Ch and Spreading Factor SF For some channel types the possible values are limited or preset e g F PICH F TDPICH and F PDCH Display of the symbol rate RC BTS mode only The Radio Configuration RC can be customized for two channel types For the F PDCH the you can set the configuration to either 10 QPSK 10 8PSK and 10 16QAM For CHAN channels you can set the radio con figuration to 1 2 or 3 5 Mapping MS mode only Specifies whether the channel is active on the I or Q branch Power dB State Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after pressing the Meas softkey Indicates whether a channel is active or inactive DomainConflict A red bullet indicates a conflict of any sorts between two or more channels e g two conflicting channel c
187. cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeees 129 6 3 4 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu 131 6 3 5 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Men 137 6 3 0 Softkeys of the Sweep Ne EE 143 6 3 7 Softkeys of the Marker Menu for RF Measurements sse 147 6 3 8 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Meaesurements rea 150 6 3 1 Softkeys of the Measurement Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Measurement menu in CDMA2000 Analysis or 1xEV DO Analysis mode It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the correspond ing softkey description Code Domain Analyzer 2 Leinen reete eee pza ee XXE erie 100 o S ova tU I E eu d ee 100 EE do PS MNT ER NE ETT 100 l ROWER r4 qe NA 100 7 AAE E A SOGS 101 er Ger A A 101 L Tag de DRE 102 L i fe A O TiN 102 L Ghamel RR 102 L Bandwidth nennen tens 103 L ACLR Reterence netten 104 L Spe DEE 104 L EI 105 L Weighting FIBI poc o ende o aa tuis 105 TS A A lege ees 106 A eo ae A 106 L Relative EE 107 L Absolute Um 107 Fe A A 107 As geed 107 L Power Mode 107 BR WS iii 108 L Max 2 conan dd 108 L Select Trace 108 L ACLR ADS Eed 108 A NNNM 108 BE ONIS E EM taaie Liai Taa aja 108 A gqo ePE MN NO m T teens eran ede 109 L Set CP Reterence
188. ch in screen B Both results can be read using TRACE DATA TRACE1 and TRACE DATA TRACE2 respectively If disabled screen A displays the branch and screen B provides the result summary display Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP OVER OFF Mode CDMA EVDO WCDMA Manual operation See Code Domain Overview MS mode only on page 77 SENSe CDPower PNOFfset Offset This command sets the PN offset of the base station in multiples of 64 chips Parameters Offset Range O to 511 RST 0 Example CDP PNOF 45 Sets PN offset Mode CDMA Manual operation See PN Offset on page 71 SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower PPReference Mode This command defines how the pilot channel power is displayed in the absolute sum mary In relative mode the reference power is the total power Parameters Mode ABS REL RST ABS Example CDP PPR REL Pilot channel power is displayed in relation to the total power Mode CDMA Manual operation See Pilot Power MS mode only on page 76 SENSe CDPower PREFerence Power This command specifies the reference power for the relative power result displays e g Code Domain Power Power vs PCG Parameters Power PICH TOTal PICH The reference power is the power of the pilot channel Which pilot channel is used as reference depends on the antenna diversity for details see SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 244 command TOTAal
189. cibility of 0 5 dB 99 96 of the measurements are within 0 5 dB of the true measured value This holds true for white noise The measured values are considered as non correlated if their time interval cor responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx 25 kHz i e measured values at an interval of 40 us are considered as non correlated A measurement time of 40 ms is thus required per channel for 1000 measured values This is the default sweep time which the R amp S FSV sets in coupled mode Approx 5000 measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 1 dB 99 96 i e the measurement time is to be increased to 200 ms Remote command SENSe POWer HSPeed on page 282 Set CP Reference Ch Power ACLR Defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value if channel power measurement is activated The reference value is displayed in the Tx1 Ref Power field the default value is O dBm The softkey is available only for multi carrier ACLR measurements In adjacent channel power measurement with one or several carrier signals the power is always referenced to a transmission channel i e no value is displayed for Tx1 Ref Power Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 279 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 109 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Noise Correction Ch Power ACLR If activated t
190. cie tas saveleesanapeeeetacd eoeeeyaiitian wdeeetin eersties 85 TOS Source EX Ml s 85 Tagger Policia taa 85 TITS OTS OU sia 86 Trigger Source Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 309 Trigger Source External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 309 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements 6 2 6 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed
191. classes are available Band Class 0 800 MHz Cellular Band Band Class 1 1 9 GHz PCS Band Band Class 2 TACS Band Band Class 3A JTACS Band 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and x 846 MHz 2860 MHz and lt 895 MHz Band Class 3B JTACS Band 2810 MHz and x 860 MHz except 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz Band Class 3C JTACS Band 810 MHz and gt 895 MHz Band Class 4 Korean PCS Band Band Class 5 450 MHz NMT Band Band Class 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 Band Band Class 7 700 MHz Band Band Class 8 1800 MHz Band Band Class 9 900 MHz Band Band Class 10 Secondary 800 MHz Band Class 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band Band Class 12 800 MHz PAMR Band Band Class 13 Band Class 14 2 5 GHz IMT 2000 Extension Band US PCS 1 9 GHz Band Band Class 15 AWS Band Band Class 16 US 2 5 GHz Band Band Class 17 US 2 5 GHz Forward Link Only Band Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 225 CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea surement independently of the predefined standards for details see also chap ter 6 4 13 Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 174 and chapter 6 4 14 Opti mized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 175 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 of TX Chan CP ACLR Settings
192. closed Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result RohdegSchwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock 6 3 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 The following chapter describes the softkeys and menus available for RF measure ments in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there 6 3 1 Softkeys of the Measurement Menu 97 6 3 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Men 126 6 3 3 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements cccc
193. corded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a PCG To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors e Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GER GATE IN to the external trigger output of the signal generator Signal generator settings e Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 Link direction Downlink Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BS Analysis 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A
194. ctive channels FERRor Frequency error in Hz FERPpm Frequency error in ppm CERRor Chip rate error in ppm TFRame Trigger to frame IQOFfset IQ offset in QlMbalance IQ imbalance in SRATe Symbol rate in ksps CHANnel Channel number SFACtor Spreading factor of channel TOFFset Timing offset in s POFFset Phase offset in rad CDPabsolute Channel power absolute in dBm CDPRelative CALCulate Subsystem Channel power relative in dB relative to total or PICH power refer to CDP PREF command EVMRms Error vector magnitude RMS in EVMPeak Error vector mag peak in DMType Domain type Example CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PTOT Reads out total power CDP SLOT 2 Selects power control group 2 CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES EVMR Reads out Composite EVM of the code with number 11 in PCG 2 Usage Query only Mode CDMA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Manual operation See Center Mkr Freq span gt 0 on page 91 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH Thi
195. d a new correction measurement is performed RST OFF Example POW NCOR ON Manual operation See Noise Correction on page 110 SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indi cated trace The corresponding trace must be active i e its state must be different from blank Note The measurement of the occupied bandwidth OBW is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To evaluate another trace marker 1 must be posi tioned to another trace with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 Manual operation See Select Trace on page 108 SENSe SWEep subsystem SENSe SWEep COUNL ect tette tenente tnt tet tete ttt te stt cos 284 SENSE SWE EGAT G nanyana tspevncsderagniagecehencdedtsubanundedaiyes Aana SAAE E EAA 284 ISENSeTSWEGDEGATETIOLBDOf 2t cete ed 285 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGHh tette tette tenente tenete totes 285 SENSe SWEep EGATePOLarly rien xac idas 285 SENSe SWEep EGATE SOURCE hh nenne theses nsn aiaiai aaia 285 IGENZGelGwEentGATe RACeck CGOMMent nennen enhn nnne 286 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PDERiod nennen 286 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STARt range sss eene 286 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range sse 287 SBENS amp e SWEep EGATe TYPE
196. d and required selection to sup press spectral components outside the channel to be measured especially of the adjacent channels the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too large As a general approach the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 196 and 496 of the channel bandwidth A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards the Adjust Settings softkey sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW lt 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected e Video bandwidth VBW For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in band width A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video bandwidths The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three times the resolution bandwidth VBW gt 3x RBW The Adjust Settin
197. d in the next range Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt 1 to 50 RST 25 Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list 7 2 3 6 CALCulate STATistics subsystem GAL GulatesnsSTATistics CCDP STAT 2 2 rra neees rada 219 CAL Culate nz GTATeticehNGAMples ttn nn nnns 220 CALCu latesn ER MN ET TE 220 ee HERR LE NEE 220 CALCulate nz GTATlsttce GCAleATOoONCE nn ssna senten s stes e tss aan 221 CALCulate nz GTATlstceGCAlexhbRAaNGe nsn esnn set ssa sn sssh sida ans r sias 221 CALCu late lt n gt STATistices SCALe X RLEVGl see en nnns nn tss nass nn nas 222 CAL Culate nz GTATlsttce GCAlexvlOWer esee nennen nene sss E 222 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCALexv UNITA 222 CALECulatesms STATIstics SCALeY UPP eet cera cei certae 223 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe State This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is Switched off CALCulate Subsystem Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples lt NoMeasPoints gt This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statisti cal measurement functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoMeasPoints gt 100 to 1E9 RST 100000 Ex
198. d whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No additional evaluation is performed by the video filter This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 269 RBW VBW Noise 10 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 269 RBW VBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 269 Span RBW Auto 100 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R amp S FSV This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto
199. de schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG CDMA2000 is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association TIA USA Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV K82 K83 Contents 1 2 1 3 1 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Contents xir 5 Documentation OverviQw iicet ianua aine cdi ins 5 Conventions Used in the Documentation eee 7 How to Use the Help System cesses nennen nennen nennen nnn 8 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models enne 9 piger Piero A 10 Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 11 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option EE 13 Test Setup for Base Station TesStS ooooonnonnionncnccnnnnicennnnnnnnnncancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 13 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 15 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eeeeeneeennnn n 15 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 17 Measuring the Trig
200. decreased in steps of 1000 points e Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set The default value is 691 sweep points This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 288 6 3 7 Softkeys of the Marker Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Marker menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Mode for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 6 2 7 Softkeys of the Marker Menu for CDA Measurements on page 88 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta 147 More EE 148 Marker Norm MRT E 148 Matker to T4866 EE 148 PUREE P RESTORE ETT 148 Makor TaBe RETRO ODE DEDIT 148 Miis HA 149 L Stepsize Bishdaki cuentan rai tss ic 149 L Stepsize Sweep Points 149 Link Mki and Delta caeci idi rer e etie ed eaa Ger m PC reed a 149 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta The Marker X softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the marker to be set to Pressing the softkey again deactivates the selected marker If a marker value is changed using the rotary knob the step size is defined via the Stepsize Standard or Stepsize Sweep Points softkeys Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Marker 1 is always the reference marker for relative measurements If activ
201. defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 305 INPut EATT on page 305 6 2 4 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 301 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Sweep menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 6 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu on page 143 Continuous SWEEP T 84 SS E 84 CONTINUE SINGIG SWE eere hen dete een andes e uen Ce ERU Y Prae e dee ed 84 SOIRS T 84 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 84 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 311 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops a
202. describes all softkeys available in the Marker menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 7 Softkeys of the Marker Menu for RF Measurements on page 147 Makar Zo TEE 88 Marker Norm Delta coca ada 88 AIMAR OOM ad 89 Marker 1 2 3 4 Selects the corresponding marker and activates it Marker 1 is always a normal marker After Marker 2 to 4 have been switched on they are delta markers that are referenced to Marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value displays using the Marker Norm Delta softkey When Marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey Switches on an additional delta marker Pressing the Marker 1 to Marker 4 softkey again switches the corresponding marker off For the Channel Bitstream measurement only one marker Marker 1 is available It can be used for scrolling and to display the number and value of a bit Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 217 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 197 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 198 Marker Norm Delta Changes the active marker to a normal norm or delta
203. dialog box R amp S FSV K82 K83 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option K83 6 Setan external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default Screen A shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement including the values for the Composite EVM 5 7 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vec tor represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the refer ence signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the PCGs and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized c
204. ds Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the lt UpperLimit gt upper adjacent channel RST 200DBM CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent chan nel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the com mand the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to
205. e BANDwidth RESolution on page 257 e VBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 258 Sweep Time Mode see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO on page 265 e Sweep Time see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME on page 264 e Reference level see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel on page 264 e RF Att Mode see SENSe ESPect rum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 261 e RfAttenuation see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 260 e Preamp see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe on page 261 SENSe Subsystem Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP HSP ON Manual operation See Fast SEM on page 111 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard This command selects the specified XML file under C Nx sNinstrNsem sta If the file is stored in a subdirectory include the relative path Example ESP PRES WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass 31 39 xml Selects the PowerClass 31 39 xml XML file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory ESP PRES W CDMA 3GPP DL 31 39 dBm The query returns information about the selected standard the link direction and the power class If no standard has been selected the query returns None Manual operation See Load Standard on page 120 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore This command copies the XML files f
206. e CDPower PPReference on page 249 Power Reference Result Settings Determines the reference power for relative power measurements Pilot Channel By default the reference power is the power of the pilot channel Which pilot channel is used as the reference depends on the Antenna Diversity on page 72 Total Power The power is measured over one PCG The reference power is the total power of the signal for the corresponding PCG Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements By default the power of the channels is referred to the power of the pilot channel code number 0 The power of the pilot channel is identical over all PCGs Therefore it can be used as a constant reference for the result display In contrast the total power can vary from PCG to PCG due to the possibility of a power level change in the different code channels In the Power vs PCG result display with enabled power control and reference to the total power of the signal the power control of the selected channel is not necessarily reflected Example theoretical There is just one data channel in the signal and its power is controlled The power is referred to the total power of the signal which consists only of the contri bution from this one data channel In the Power vs PCG diagram a straight line is displayed instead of the expected power staircase For relative result displays the reference value Total Power is therefore only
207. e if neces sary To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Return values lt Result gt The measured value of the selected marker is returned The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 89 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 CALCulate Subsystem 7 2 3 5 CALCulate PSE subsystem CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate essen 218 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO 22 cecinit teen dete che uda ave ka a nda 218 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin ies nn nn 218 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarch PDGtow enne enne nnns 219 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges essen 219 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate This command switches the spurious limit check off If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit you ha
208. e determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 267 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 267 Coupling Ratio Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth This softkey and its submenu is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF RBW VBW Sine 1 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 269 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 RBW VBW Pulse 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW This coupling ratio is recommende
209. e external reference e Select the standard and the desired measurement Set the PN offset Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the CDMA2000 signal is dis played The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermo dulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard CDMA2000 Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option 3 Start the Power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Power softkey 4 Setthe center frequency to 878 49 MHz 5 Setthe reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm On the screen the spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed In the table below the diagram the numeric values of the channel bandwidth of the TX Channel and power level of the analyzed signal are listed Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products the R amp S FSV offers a spectrum emission mask measurement The measurement com Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask pares the power against
210. e front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available P Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign To display a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the correspond ing help topic is displayed Tochange to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics e To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002
211. e gt FREQuency STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for the specified range In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the mea surement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Note the rules for the Frequency parameter specified in chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 SENSe Subsystem Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Frequency numeric value RST 250 0 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 2 52 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG1 STAR 100000000 Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 111 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range For further details refer to the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt command Note the rules for the Frequency parameter specified in chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Frequency numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG3 STOP 10000000 Sets the stop fr
212. e marker delta marker to the next minimum right to the marker of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MIN LEFT gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 195 CALC MARK MIN RIGH gt CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 214 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 196 CALC MARK MIN NEXT abs CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 196 Center Mkr Freq span gt 0 Sets the center frequency to the current marker or delta marker frequency A signal can thus be set to as center frequency for example to examine it in detail with a smaller span This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 186 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Auto Set menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurements Auto EE 91 PUTO TRGB Mm 92 AID OV DEE 92 SUI A vaste rh dier PEE br term eege Eed 92 L Meas Time NA cda ii T 92 RM TUN NI TE 92 L Upper Level Hvsteresls retten tnt tnnt ttn tna tnt rtr tenens 92 L Lower Level Hysteresis esee ia 93 Auto All Performs all automatic settings e Auto Freq on page 92 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements e Auto Level on page
213. e mea sured channel power Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio stand ards Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value O to 100dB limit for the lower and the upper alternate lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 0 DB Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 106 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are obtained Suffix n S
214. e specified designation e TIA TIA 97 F 1 e TTA TTAT 3G C S0010 C v2 0 When the CDMA2000 specification is mentioned in the document these standards are meant The CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option supports the radio configurations 1 to 5 e all radio configurations with a single carrier 1X are supported Accordingly IS95A B sig nals conforming to radio configurations 1 amp 2 can be measured with the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option In addition to the measurements called for by the CDMA2000 standard in the code domain the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option features measure ments in the spectral range such as channel power adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings To open the CDMA2000 settings menu e Press the MODE key and select the required CDMA2000 option e If the required CDMA2000 Mode is already active press the HOME key The CDMA2000 menu is displayed which is identical to the Measurement menu For details on the measurement types see chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 35 e Measurements and Result Displays cns dece tase 35 e Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements sss 57 e Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K 97 e Eiuspnberlnfottialli sicco rre ia 151 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays The CDMA2000 Analysis options provide the following test measurement types and result displays All measurements and result displays
215. e type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 266 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT OFF Deactivates the use of an RRC filter Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 115 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa Value This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe command and if the RRC filter is activated SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe command Parameters Value 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT ON Activates the use of an RRC filter ESP FILT ALPH 0 5 Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter to 0 5 Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 115 SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed State This command activates Fast SEM mode to accelerate spurious emission mask meas urements For details see chapter 6 4 12 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measure ments on page 172 Note that in Fast SEM mode the following parameters cannot be changed in all ranges e Filter type see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FILTer TYPE on page 259 e RBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe rang
216. e values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges Any changes to the range settings in active Symmetric Setup mode lead to symmetri cal changes in the other ranges where possible In particular this means e Inserting ranges a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range e Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted e Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord ingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetric Setup mode is on not all range set tings can be set automatically Edit Reference Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Reference Range x Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Peak Power Channel Power Settings 1 Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings 1 Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power
217. ed sine wave signal In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impe dance 50 Q or 75 Q conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpw Volt Ampere Watt Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 224 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 306 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mix
218. edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 309 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 285 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well
219. el POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 275 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the adjacent channel to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ALT1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt on page 276 Activates the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel on page 275 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 to 0 35 Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate and define the limits for the ACLR measurement Limit Checking Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate limit checking for the ACLR measurement The following rules apply for the limits e A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel The limit applies to both the upper and the lower adjacent channel e A relative and or absolute limit can be defined The check of both limit values can be activated independently e The R amp S FSV checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the limits are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute or rel Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 ative levels If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is excee ded the measured value is marked b
220. el gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example CDP ICT 50 Sets the Inactice Channel Threshold to 50 dB Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 SENSe CDPower lQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command sets the capture length in multiples of the power control group Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 64 RST 3 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Mode CDMA Manual operation See Capture Length on page 64 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example CDP LEV ADJ Adjusts the reference level Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalComponent gt This command switches between and Q component of the signal SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt SignalComponent gt l Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Mode CDMA WCDMA Manual operation See Select on page 79 SENSe CDPower L CODe MASK Mask Defines the long code mask of the mobile in hexadecimal form Note For the default mask value of 0 the long code offset see is not taken into con sideration Parameters Mask Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example INST SEL MC2K
221. elect ing the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz SENSe Subsystem Manual operation See Res BW on page 121 See Res BW Manual on page 138 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO State This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the channel filters available are not set by the automatic coupling Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio to define the ratio RBW span Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span Manual operation See Res BW Manual on page 138 See Res BW Auto on page 138 See Default Coupling on page 143 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available for sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterMode gt AUTO The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best measurement results NARR
222. elects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters State Example CALCulate Subsystem ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power meas urements The commands CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit
223. ement Examples for the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option K83 Up to a frequency error of approximately 1 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSV is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message 2 Resetthe center frequency of the signal generator to 833 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSV 5 5 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a PCG To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the mea
224. emote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 211 Marker Table Defines how the marker information is displayed This softkey is available for RF measurements For more information see Displayed Marker Information in the description of the base unit On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Aut Default The marker table is displayed automatically if more than 2 markers are active and removed if only 1 or 2 markers are active This helps keep the information in the display clear Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 235 Marker Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of all markers and delta markers Default value for the marker step size is Stepsize Sweep Points This softkey is available for RF measurements Stepsize Standard Marker Stepsize Moves the marker or delta marker from one measurement point to the next if the marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta softkeys see Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 If more measured values than measurement points exist it is not possible to read out all measured values In this case use the Stepsize Sweep Points softkey Remote command CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN
225. en the Fast SEM mode is activated the ranges for which these criteria apply are displayed as one single range The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual sweep times initially but can be changed When the Fast SEM mode is deactivated the originally defined individual sweep times are reset If Symmetrical Setup mode is active when Fast SEM mode is activated not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically see also Symmetric Setup on page 115 Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each included range and remain changed even after deactivating Fast SEM mode 6 4 13 O Example Sweep List Range Start Range Stop Filter Type Sweep Time Mode Ref Level Range 1 12 75 MHz i Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Further Information 8 MHz 4 MHz 3 515 MHz 8 MHz Channel 4 MHz 3 515 MHz Gaussian 2 715 MHz 1 MHz 30 kHz 10 MHz 10 MHz RF Att Mode RF Attenuator Transd Factor 30 ms 10 dBm Auto 10 dB None Off None None Limit Check 1 Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Abs Limit Start 1 23 5 dBm 19 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 20 5 dBm Abs Limit Stop 1 23 5 dBm 19 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 20 5 dBm 20 5 dBm Rel Limit Start 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50
226. ending on measurement which are also separated by a semico lon File contents header and data section Description Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 50 Firmware version Further Information File contents header and data section Date 01 Apr 2010 Description Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 96 Y axis reference position Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results values List of results 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup For a detailed description refer to chapter 6 4 7 ASCII File Export Format on page 161 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis spa Rui Ho HuG Ro MUn P 9 i
227. ending order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class of the base spreading factor CTABle parameter The command returns 7 values for each channel in the following order max time offset in s gt code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 gt reserved 6 gt Value Description Range Unit time offset maximum time offset S code number code number of the channel with maximum time offset 0 127 code class code class of the channel with maximum time offset 2 7 lt phase offset gt maximum phase offset rad lt code number gt code number of the channel with maximum phase offset 0 127 lt code class gt code class of the channel with maximum phase offset 2 7 lt reserved 1 6 gt reserved Result Summary The command returns 22 values for each channel in the following order lt SLOT gt lt PTOTal gt lt PPICh gt lt RHO gt lt MACCuracy gt lt PCDerror gt lt ACTive gt lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt TFRame gt lt CERRor gt lt IQOFfset gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt Value Description Range Unit lt SLOT gt Number of the PCG l
228. ent are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IQ IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base st
229. ent value i e in descending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value Usage Event CALCulate Subsystem Manual operation See Next Min on page 90 See Next Min Mode on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary If no minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt
230. ently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to chap ter 6 4 9 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 163 If you load one of the provided XML files Load Standard softkey see Load Stand ard on page 120 the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the selected standard For further details refer also to chapter 6 4 10 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 168 Note If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Range Start Range Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range Follow the rules descri bed in chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency The minimum span of the reference ran
231. ep time increases the stability of the measurement results R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the Band width menu Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 288 Fast ACLR On Off Ch Power ACLR Switches between the IBW method Fast ACLR Off and the zero span method Fast ACLR On When switched on the R amp S FSV sets the center frequency consecutively to the differ ent channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measure ment time sweep time number of channels The RBW filters suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used e g root raised cos with IS 136 For details on available channel filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results Therefore this requires no software correction factors Measured values are output as a list The powers of the transmission channels are out put in dBm the powers of the adjacent channels in dBm The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results Repro ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period As a general approach it can be assumed that approx 500 non correlated measured values are required for a reprodu
232. equency for range 2 to 10 MHz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 111 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation Value This command sets the attenuation for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 0 dB Example ESP RANG3 INP ATT 10 Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB Manual operation See RF Attenuator on page 112 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG2 0INP ATT AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2 Manual operation See RF Att Mode on page 112 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe State This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON O
233. er Polarity on page 64 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz Parameters Source EXTernal IFPower VIDeo RFPower PSEN RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power SENSe Subsystem Manual operation See Gated Trigger On Off on page 125 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent Comment Defines a comment for one of the traces for gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Parameters Comment Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 125 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod Value This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Parameters Value numeric value RST 0s Example SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 125 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt Value This command defines the starting point for the range to be traced using gated trigger ing Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range Le range Parameters Value numeric value RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1
234. er according to the formula level mixer level RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 300 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 300 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic atten
235. er maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak on page 89 See Next Peak Mode on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode If no maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Peak on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X values CALCulate Subsystem If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the curr
236. er of adjacent channels 2 For details on the softkeys of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement refer to the Ch Power ACLR softkey in the Measurement menu Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the 3GPP2 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the 3GPP2 standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions Beneath the measurement screen a table showing the peak list In the peak list the val ues for the worst spectral emissions are displayed including their frequency and power The default settings of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement are listed in the table below Measurements and Result Displays Setting Default value Frequency Span 8 MHz Sweep Time 100 ms Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement refer to the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey in the Measurement menu 6 1 4 4 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which the signal power can be found By default the bandwidth is displayed in which 99 96 of the signal is found The percentage of the signal power included
237. er of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 311 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 310 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution o
238. erated reference signal When RHO is measured the CDMA2000 standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied e Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and the ideal refer ence signal For further details refer to the chapter 6 1 3 6 Composite EVM RMS on page 45 result display e IQ Imbalance Offset Shows the IQ imbalance and the DC offset of the signal in R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Channel results Under Channel the measurement results of the selected channel and the selected PCG are displayed e Power Relative Shows the channel power of the selected channel and PCG The result depends on the selected Code Power the Power Reference and absolute channel power e Power Absolute Shows the absolute channel power of the selected channel and PCG e Timing Offset Shows the timing offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel e Phase Offset Shows the phase offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel e Symbol EVM Shows the peak or mean value of the EVM measurement result For further details refer to the chapter 6 1 3 9 EVM vs Symbol on page 48 result display e Modulation BTS mode only Displays the modulation type of the channel and PCG BPSK QPSK 8PSK or 16QAM e Mapping Indicates the selected branch or Q 6 1 3 5 Code Domain Error Power This result display shows the difference in power of the test
239. eration See Save Evaluation List on page 116 See ASCII File Export on page 116 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 6 4 7 ASCII File Export Format on page 161 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 310 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Trace 1 to 6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut IF SOURce Source This command selects the source of the IF output Parameters Source IF intermediate frequency output ViDeo video output 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector Manual operation See Video Output on page 150 OUTPut TRIGger lt PortLevel gt This command selects level of the Trigger Out port Thus you can trigger an additional device via the exter
240. ers see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 Auto on page 141 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 289 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 289 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 289 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to
241. ery these results use the command TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt p B Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 53 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis 6 1 3 16 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calcu lation is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the PCG of a special chan nel Positive values of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one Symbol Phase Error 61 Clrw 3 Sym Sym 23 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt 6 1 4 RF Measurement Results e Signal Channel POWER voor a AAA 54 e Adjacent Channel POWET coil imr lali ed 55 e Spectrum Emission Mask 55 e Occupied BE Tee ER 56 e Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF essssss 56 6 1 4 1 Signal Channel Power The Signal Channel Power measurement analyses the RF sig
242. es has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Start Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at start fre Yes quency Unit dBm Hz dBm Sets the unit of the start dBc dBr dB value Stop Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at stop fre quency Unit dBm Hz dBm Sets the unit of the stop dBc dBr dB value LimitFailMode Absolute Relative If used it has to be identical No Absolute and Rel to DefaultLimitFailMode ative Absolute or Relative RBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz gt RBW on page 112 Yes Type NORM PULS No CFIL RRC VBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz gt VBW on page 112 Yes Detector NEG POS If used it has to be identical No SAMP RMS in all ranges AVER QUAS Sweep Mode Manual Auto Sweep Time Mode Yes on page 112 Time time in sec Sweep Time on page 112 No Amplitude No ReferenceLevel Value power in dBm gt Ref Level on page 112 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes if the Refer enceLevel node is used RFAttenuation Mode Manual Auto RF Att Mode on page 112 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF Preamp on page 113 Yes 6 4 10 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement You can change the settings manually or via XML files The XML files offer a quick way to change the configuration A set of ready made XML files for d
243. es one channel table to another Select the channel table you want to copy using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters TargetFileName lt string gt name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 for copying CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies CTAB 1 to CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO BTS mode K84 only For MS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 229 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt ChannelType gt The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64 chip length 3 PREAMBLE with 128 chip length 4 PREAMBLE with 256 chip length 5 PREAMBLE with 512 chip length 6 PREAMBLE with 1024 chip length 7 DATA CONFigure Subsystem lt CodeClass gt Depending on channel type the following values are allowed PILOT 5 MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2 9de class lt CodeNumber gt 0 spreading factor 1 lt Modulation gt Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I
244. esult in damage to the instrument Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base station to the RF input of the R amp S FSV Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer e The R amp S FSV must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the CDMA2000 specification for frequency measurements on base stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e If the base station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base sta tion to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presettings Enter the external attenuation Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency e Set the trigger 4 2 4 3 Measuring the Signal Channel Power e If used enable th
245. et a EAEE 72 Base SF Long Code MS mode 73 A A bad used aa eta nece ad d aeo 73 Bit pe 17 MEE 74 L bong EE 74 L Long Code Get MONG oer 74 Result SENGS EE 74 L AE 75 L Channel Code Number cc scere radere Donde 75 LS O o E E 76 Bereet 76 L Pilot Power MS mode om 76 L Power FIO eT ue ii eR E Un ra rta MR Rad 76 L Time Phase Eetmation entente tenete tnra tnrthtntetetanen 77 M IND ME RET 77 L Code Domain Overview MS mode only 77 BI OMG EE 7T SII I M 79 Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings In addition you can change the current settings via this dialog box To reset all values to their default state press the Set to Default button Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Center Frequency 3 5 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier Off Demodulation Base Spreading Factor 64 PN Offset zu Multi Carrier Off Enhanced Algorithm Off Multi Carrier Filter Off Filter Type LowPass Roll Off Factor mu Cut Off Frequency 1 25 MHz Antenna Diversity Off Invert Q Off Capture Length 3 Set Count zT Set To Analyze 0 Trigger Source Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive Search Mode Auto Search Trigger Offset 0 0 s Inactive Threshold 6
246. et of channel tables compliant with the CDMA2000 specification Channel table Contents RECENT Contains the channels that were automatically created during the last mea surement with the Auto Search option activated for details refer to Channel Tables on page 67 EACHOP Channel table for Enhanced Access CHannel OPeration with PICH and EACH RCCCHOP Channel table for Reverse Common Control CHannel OPeration with PICH and CCCH RTCHOP3 Channel table for Reverse Traffic CHannel OPeration with the following 3 channels PICH DCCH FCH RTCHOP5 Channel table for Reverse Traffic CHannel OPeration with the following 5 channels PICH DCCH FCH S1CH S2CH O To use channels other than those in the predefined channel tables you can copy the original tables and modify the channels in the copy Table 6 1 Base station channel table for main branch in radio configuration 1 MPC_RC1 Channel Type Number of Chan Code Channel Walsh Radio Configura nels Code SF tion F PICH 1 0 64 F SYNC 1 32 64 F PCH 1 1 64 CHAN 6 9 64 1 10 64 1 11 64 1 15 64 1 17 64 1 25 64 1 Further Information Table 6 2 Base station channel table for main branch in radio configuration 4 MPC RC4 Channel Type Number of Chan Code Channel Walsh Radio Configura nels Code SF tion F PICH 1 0 64 F SYNC 1 32 64 F PCH 1 1 64 CHAN 6 9 128 4 10 128 4
247. etailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 and chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 268 6 3 6 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Continuous SWEEP OT ei 144 ele TE n 144 Continue Single ween 144 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 SwesbUme Manual E 144 SWE SITING ALO E 145 UIN c 145 E A A ll ane a 145 A iinet ast 146 D geed 146 EE ANE 146 e me T HX 146 BEL oS ERR RR HT 146 SES m 146 WEED POMS fe M 147 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count Softkey Sweep Count on page 84 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 311 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the numb
248. ey is available for code domain measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH on page 186 F TDPICH BTS mode only Sets the marker to the F TDPICH channel The softkey is only available if the x axis of the active screen is a code axis This softkey is available for code domain measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TDPIch on page 190 PICH MS mode only Sets the marker to the PICH channel The softkey is only available if the x axis of the active screen is a code axis This softkey is available for code domain measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH on page 186 Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 214 Next Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 196 6 2 9 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Next Min Mode Sets the mode for the Next Min softkey This softkey is available for code domain measurements Three settings are available lt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum left to the marker of the selected trace abs Sets the active marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace gt Sets the activ
249. f e atteint rrt trente eene TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence I FPower HYSTeresis TRiGger lt n gt ESEQuence MEV el BBROWEM E TRIGger sn E SEQUuence E EVel EXTernal rrr tn trn erret TRIGgersn gt Ree Re lS Ee E RT lee e E Index A ACLR absolute limit tereti Ea 107 adjacent channel name remote control 277 alternate channel name remote control 210 Channel Bandwidth sss 103 channel name remote control 210 Channel names ass ores SEENEN 105 Channel Spacing s oed i RSEN MEE 104 limit check 106 Limit Checking 106 number of channels x 102 reference 104 relative limit waza 107 Weighting Filter coria taa o 105 ACLR Measurement cooocccccnocccononcccnonnnccnnnncnncnnnccnnannnnnnnnnns 100 p 55 Add Channel KR adjacent channel leakage ratio aa KB C Amplitude MEMU ec 131 Amplitude menu A cvsanneuavanseasd cuasaviveeaiioai des enatiouenes 81 Antenna Diversity KG E 72 ASCII Trace exportarla as 161 attenuation option B25 tette tease 83 135 Attenuation option B29 eic R 83 135 Le NEE 82 135 Manual 82 134 300 Option E 82 134 Auto level ek Auto Peak detector Auto Scale el EE Auto Set menu p
250. factor Number of values 128 24 64 48 32 96 16 192 TRACe Subsystem 8PSK modulation Spreading factor Number of values 32 144 16QAM modulation Spreading factor Number of values 32 192 Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of a different number of bits For BPSK modulated signals there is one bit per symbol for QPSK modulated signals there are 2 bits per symbol for 8 PSK modulated signals there are 3 bits per symbol and for 16QAM modulated signal there are 4 bits per symbol With transmit diversity activated the values reduce to the half Magnitude Error vs Chip The comand returns a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected PCG The values are calculated as the magnitude difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in 96 and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected PCG Phase Error vs Chip The comand returns a list of phase error values of all chips at the selected PCG The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the ref erence signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected PCG Symbol Magnitude Error The comand returns the magnitude error in 96 of each symbol at the selected PCG The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbol
251. fine the display range of a logarithmic level axis man ually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 238 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default set ting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN See DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Unit Opens the Unit submenu to select the unit for the level axis The default setting is dBm If a transducer is switched on the softkey is not available Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 In general the signal analyzer measures the signal voltage at the RF input The level display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulat
252. fter the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 311 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 310 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values O or 1 are set one Sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram 6 2 5 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count O default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 284 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trigger menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit A o paces exceed ce a cee
253. ftkeys with the assignment of commands are provided at the end of this chapter chapter 8 Status Reporting System of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 on page 315 Contains device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K82 chapter 9 Glossary on page 316 Contains an explanation of terms and abbreviations related to the code domain analysis chapter 10 Appendix on page 317 This part of the documentation includes only functions of the Application Firmware R amp S FSV K82 and K83 For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the base unit 3 Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Sta tion Tests This section describes the default settings of the R amp S FSV if it is used as a CDMA2000 base or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSV has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the Quick Start Guide Preparing For Use Furthermore the application firmware of the R amp S FSV K82 base station or K83 mobile station must be enabled Installation and enabling of the application firmware are described in the Quick Start Guide Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minim
254. fullscale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG AUTO ON Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 94 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 94 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO
255. ge 127 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 128 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 128 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 128 See x Span span 0 on page 128 See x RBW span gt 0 on page 128 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor Factor This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters Factor Range 1 to 100 RST 10 Default unit PCT SENSe Subsystem Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 127 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 128 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 128 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 128 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 62 SENSe FREQuency SPAN Span This command defines the frequency span Parameters Span min span to fmax RST fmax fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ SPAN 10MHz Manual operation See Span Manual on page 130 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command sets the frequency span to its maximum Example FREQ SPAN FULL Manual operation See Full Span on page 130 SENSe FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt This command defines the
256. ge is given by the current TX Bandwidth Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARt on page 259 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STOP on page 260 Fast SEM Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates Fast SEM mode for all ranges in the sweep list For details see chap ter 6 4 12 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 172 Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Symmet rical Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on not all range settings can be set automatically Remote command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Filter Type Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the filter type for this range For details on filters see also chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE on page 259 RBW Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the RBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth RESolution on page 257 VBW Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the VBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum
257. gered Relative Code Domain Power 19 Measuring the Composite EVM eeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nnne nnne nnn rnit 20 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 22 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option A A teen Pte ore ere 24 Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 24 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 26 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask ccccccsseseeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenenseeneesnenes 27 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 28 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 30 Measuring the Composite EVM eeeeeeeeeeeennenneenen nennen nnn nnne nnn 31 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 33 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis 35 Measurements and Result Displays eeeseeeeeenenneeeennn nennen 35 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements eene 57 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 eene 97 Further Information erit isa a aaaea iaaea ea EEN ege 151 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 3 7 1 7 2 7 3 ZA 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 10 Remote
258. gs softkey sets the video bandwidth VBW as a function of the channel bandwidth see formula above and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size will be selected e Detector Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 176 Further Information The Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS detector This detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula P 158 EMS N a i where s linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per measurement point Paus power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited num ber of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable results Trace averaging The Adjust Settings softkey switches off this function Averaging which is often performed to stabilize the measureme
259. gt 0 branch 1 Q branch lt Activity gt 0 65535 decimal The decimal number interpreted as a binary number in 16 bits determines the half slot in which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value 0 See table 7 1 lt Reserved1 gt Always 0 reserved lt Status gt O inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily lt Reserved2 gt Always 0 reserved Example INST SEL MDO Activate 1xXEV DO MS CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Select table to edit CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 4 0 0 65535 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 43690 0 1 0 2 2 2 1 65535 0 1 0 Selects PICH 0 16 on I with full activity RRI 0 16 on I in each even numbered half slot and DATA 2 4 on Q with full activity Mode EVDO MS Table 7 1 Examples for Activity parameter settings Dec Binary Description 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 Channel is active in each half slot e g DATA 43690 1010 1010 1010 1010 Channel is active in half slot 0 2 4 etc e g RRI 24576 0110 0000 0000 0000 Channel is active in half slot 1 and 2 e g DRC CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table Select the channel table you want to delete using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 2 for deleting CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes channel table CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigu
260. gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Value This command defines a reference level offset Suffix n irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Ref Level Offset on page 63 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border Range O to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Manual operation See Ref Level Position on page 136 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix n irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Value RST 0 dB coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVA
261. hannels of a channel table are assumed to be active For further details also refer to the Channel Tables on page 67 field and the chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Chan nel Tables on page 151 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 227 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 231 Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Table Settings Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive The parameter is available in the Auto Search mode of the Channel Table Settings dialog box Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The default value is 60 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the CDMA2000 test models are located by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inactive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICThreshold on page 245 Channel Tables Channel Table Settings In this field a list of the available channel tables is shown The selected channel table is the basis for future measurements until you choose another or activate Auto Search An active channel table must describe the supplied signal completely also in regard to the transmit diversity see Antenna Diversity on page 72 Using the softkeys customized channel tables c
262. he Wrong PN Offset The last adjustment is setting the PN Pseudo Noise offset correctly The measure ment is only valid if the PN offset on the analyzer is the same as that of the transmit signal e Seta PN Offset Open the Demodulation Settings dialog box Inthe PN Offset field enter 200 Again screen A shows the CDP measurement screen B the result summary In the result summary the Trigger to Frame result is not correct Also the error message SYNC FAILED indicates that the synchronization has failed gt Inthe PN Offset field enter 0 After adjusting it the PN offset on the R amp S FSV is the same as that of the signal In the result summary the Trg To Frame value is now shown correctly 4 6 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 20 Measuring the Composite EVM error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in 96 In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are s
263. he grid is always at O dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 239 Noise Correction If activated the results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increa ses the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise cor rection must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise cor rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 282 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 301 Input 50 0 75 Q Uses 50 Q or 75
264. he results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increa ses the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise cor rection must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise cor rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 282 Adjust Ref Lvl Ch Power ACLR Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the set tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the description of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maxi
265. his command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode Manual
266. hown in a dia gram in which the x axis represents the examined PCGs and the y axis shows the EVM values Test Setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cables with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV L to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors e Connect external triggering of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE to the signal genera tor s trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings e Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 e Link direction Downlink Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BTS Analysis 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Composite EVM measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box R amp S FSV K82 K83 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 6 Setan external trigger source
267. iber dl fre ee pac DR eee menge Hut e coe peat SENSe BANDwidth BWIDih VID6O ALTO icta etae testetur c x ee t osa EE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID60O RATIO 7 a tacet etico fete onere eoa E deeded SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID60O TYPE coito EEN e SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESOlutiori 2 7 2 Ber o ttai tenses a SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution F FT rrt trn tine nnne ne SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE essere eene EI E e ee e ME ET SENSe CDPower CODE E SENSe JEDPower et e BEE EI E e Ree e el e EE ISENS e ee ee EE SENSe CDPower LCODe MODE SENSe CDPower ECOD e OFFS t reete eth ehe aen re e tede Ene e EVER EE adn E E JCDPOWwer ERR E SENSe CDPower MAPPING DEE SENSe CDPOWerNORMAlIZC ei e rtt then rec e aa reed a ca e Xo qe e ed ISENS JCDPOWer RE SENSe CDPower e EE SENSe CDPower PNOFfset E E e ee el Ee EE EI E e Reeg EE EI E e ee e eil di E E E e Eeer e AA aa Ei E e Ree e WEE EI E e ee e Eer el TE E E e ee e EI Ee ee RE SENSE 8 B dod a di E e SENSeJESRectrim iBW RE SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa SENSe ESPeetrum FIETerRRC ESTATe si irit on tot a ia rte thon SENSe ESPeetr m HighSBPeed EE SENSe ESPectr m PRESSE RES TOF6 niii ic eth ether ir t a S Er EY dee LE ENER EE goe SENSe ESPe ctrum
268. ies to all traces in the window 7 7 STATus subsystem Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps SENSe AVERage lt n gt STATe lt Trace gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Suffix n Selects the measurement window Trace 1 6 Selects the trace Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example AVER OFF Switches off the average calculation for trace 1 AVER STAT3 ON Switches on the average calculation for trace 3 STATus subsystem STATUS QUEStionable S YNO CONDIOR coincida EE 290 STATUs QUEStionable SYNG EEMENI euenire prenne euet mann nno aane rre nnn appen 291 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis Return values Result If the result is ON an error occurred Details can be obtained using STAT QUES SYNC EVEN RST OFF Example STAT QUES SYNC COND T 8 TRACe Subsystem Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt This command reads the information on the error situation i
269. ifferent standards is Further Information already provided For details see table 6 14 You can also create and use your own XML files for details see chapter 6 4 9 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 163 All XML files are stored under C Yr_slinstrisem std Use the Load Standard softkey for quick access to the available XML files see Load Standard on page 120 Table 6 14 Provided XML files Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics cdma20001DL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO DL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL cdma2000 UL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO UL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass_31_39 xml W CDMA 3GPP 31 39 dBm DL PowerClass_39_43 xml W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL PowerClass_43_INF xml W CDMA 3GPP 43 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_31 xml W CDMA 3GPP INF 31 dBm DL WIBRO DL PowerClass 29 40 xml WiBro TTA 29 40 dBm DL PowerClass 40 INF xml WiBro TTA 40 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_29 xml WiBro TTA INF 29 dBm DL WIBRO UL PowerClass_23_INF xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL PowerClass_negINF_23 xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL WIMAX DL ETSIN MHz 1 75 System Type E xml WIMAX System Type E DL MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System Type F xml WIMAX System Type F DL System Type G xml WIMAX System Type G DL WIMAX DL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz DL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz DL WIMAX UL ETSI MH
270. iles look inthe C Nx slinstrisem std directory Spectrum Emission Mask Standard W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL Tx Power 47 93 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Range Low Range Up RBW 1 0 MHz Dr Fig 6 17 Example Spectrum emission mask standard file PowerClass_39_43 xml EE Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 163 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis pem res M H M H ang Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R amp S FSV is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen Therefore we recommend you make a copy of an existing file see Save As Standard softkey and edit the copy of the file Alternatively edit the settings using the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey and the Sweep List dialog box and save the XML file with the Save As Standard softkey after wards This way no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself Basically the file consists of three elements that can be defined e The BaseFormat element e The PowerClass element e The Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information abo
271. ilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See y Axis Max Value on page 124 7 2 3 7 Other Referenced CALCulate Commands CAL Culate nzEGbechumb GtarchlbEAksearch PGtiow ene 223 CAL CGulateen THReshold croce ciun AEN ert rn ta tdt iaa 224 CALCU UNIT POWT E 224 CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow lt State gt This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 116 7 3 7 3 1 CONFigure Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt THReshold lt Threshold gt This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search A threshold line is automatically turned on Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Threshold The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer RST STATe to OFF Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA
272. ime gt Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet RST 0 27 s Example ESP RANG1 SWE TIME 1 Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 112 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the speci fied range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG3 SWE TIME AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3 Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 112 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer lt TransducerName gt This command sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a trans ducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt TransducerName gt string name of the transducer Example ESP RANG1 TRAN test Sets the transducer called test for range 1 Manual operation See Transd Factor on page 113 7 6 2 3 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RRANge This command returns the current position number of the
273. in Value y Unit Abs y Unit Abs remote control Zero Span remote control sssini 272 Softkey AUTO E 141 146 Auto Freq Auto Level Auto Scale Once etit e tern 81 le 87 158 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 307 Blank i trennt rtt Rete Center tees Center remote control GF StepslZG roce neret Ree Clear Write Close Sweep List Cont Meas remote control sssssssss 311 Continue Single Sweep i Continuous SWEEP i pectet renes Continuous Sweep remote control 311 Decim Sep remote control a Dil Conf EE EL Atten remote control 2 etna EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control El Attem On Off e mere le e FFT Filter Mode Frequency Offset remote control Frontend Settings Full Spa oit rt stots etr terrre nee trn IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 308 Input AC DG cte tentata 84 93 137 150 Input AC DC remote Control 301 Input 50 Q 75 Q Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker 1 2 3 4 aia ere rit lta Marker to Trace Marker to Trace remote control Max Hold WEE Mech Atten Auto Mech Atten Auto remote control Mech Atten Manual oooninccnnoccnocccoccccncccnnananananno Mech Atten Manual remote control Mini Hold eter in tein Preamp Orm Olfl
274. in power of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see previous example the repetition rate of the measurement increases In screen B the result summary is displayed In the row Trigger to Frame the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the PCG is shown 5 5 1 Adjusting the Trigger Offset The delay between the trigger event and the start of the PCG can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset Set an external trigger source and the trigger offset 1 Open the IQ Capture dialog box 2 Setthe Trigger Source option to External 3 Set the Trigger Offset to 100us to compensate analog delays of the trigger event In the two screens the following results are displayed Screen A shows the the same as above In screen B the result summary is displayed In the Trg to Frame result the offset between the trigger event and the start of the PCG has been adjusted 5 6 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol Measuring the Composite EVM level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in 96 In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all ch
275. in relation to a particular span This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 267 Video BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the VBW display in the channel bar Note RMS detector and VBW If an RMS detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs How ever the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a lon ger sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves For details on detectors see chapter 6 4 3 Detector Overview on page 156 This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BW
276. in the measurement can be modified In the top right corner of the screen the bandwidth and frequency markers are displayed The default settings of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement are listed in the table below Setting Default value Occupied Bandwidth ON Frequency Span 4 2 MHz Sweep Time 100 ms RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement see Occupied Bandwidth in the Measurement menu 6 1 4 5 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF The CCDF measurement displays the CCDF and the Crest factor The CCDF shows distribution of the signal amplitudes For the measurement a signal section of settable length is recorded continuously in a zero span The measurement is useful to deter mine errors of linear amplifiers The Crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power Beneath the measurement screen a table containing the number of included samples mean and peak power and the Crest factor is displayed The default settings of the CCDF measurement are listed in the table below Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Setting Default value CCDF ON RBW 10 MHz Detector Sample For details on the softkeys of the CCDF measurement see CCDF in the Measure ment menu 6 2 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This chapter describes the menus and softkeys availa
277. ing You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 241 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Manual operation See Range Log 100 dB on page 122 See Range Log 50 dB on page 123 See Range Log 10 dB on page 123 See Range Log 5 dB on page 123 See Range Log 1 dB on page 123 See Range Log Manual on page 124 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO Mode This command turns automatic scaling of the y axis on and off If on the R amp S FSV determines the ideal scale of the y axis for the current measure ment results Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt only 1 trace Parameters lt Mode gt ON Automatic scaling is on OFF Automatic scaling is off ONCE Automatic scaling is performed once RST OFF Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Activates automatic scaling of the Y axis for the active trace Mode CDMA EVDO OFDM OFDMA WiBro PHN DISPlay Subsystem Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 81 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SY
278. ion Mask Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANsducer on page 265 Limit Check 1 4 Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the type of limit check for all ranges For details on limit checks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Abs Limit Start on page 113 Abs Limit Stop on page 113 Rel Limit Start on page 114 Rel Limit Stop on page 114 Depending on the number of active power classes see Power Class dialog box the number of limits that can be set varies Up to four limits are possible The sweep list is extended accordingly Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source STATe on page 263 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 206 Abs Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 113 Remote command SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt on page 262 Abs Limit Stop Sweep Lis
279. ital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Delay This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Delay Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 65 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt TriggerLevel gt This command
280. itched from dBm to dBm Hz The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log channel bandwidth By means of this function it is possible e g to measure the signal noise power density or use the additional functions ACLR Abs Rel on page 108 and ACLR Reference on page 104 to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 188 Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to select the power mode Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Clear Write Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the channel power and the adjacent channel powers are cal culated directly from the current trace default mode Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE WRIT see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 187 Max Hold Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm The higher value is retained If activated the enhancement label Pwr Max is displayed Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH See CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 187 Select Trace C
281. key Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 284 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 285 Gate Ranges CCDF Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Gate Ranges Comment Range 1 Start Range 1 Stop Range 1 Use Range 2 Start Range 2 Stop Range 2 Use Range 3 Start Range 3 Stop Range 3 Use Remote command SWE EGAT ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 284 Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent on page 286 Adds a comment to trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe lt range gt on page 287 Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt on page 286 Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 STop1 5ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP range on page 287 Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 PER 5ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod on page 286 Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Adjust Settings CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference
282. l e Cyan inactive e Light blue alias power of higher spreading factor Magenta alias power as a result of transmit diversity If codes with alias power are displayed set the highest base spreading factor available in the Base Spreading Factor on page 70 field It is not recommended to select more detailed result displays such as Channel Con stell for unassigned or inactive codes since the results are not valid Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDEP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 6 Composite EVM RMS This result display is for measuring the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal Thus the EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each PCG Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 45 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected PCG is displayed red You can set the number of PCGs in the Capture Length on page 64 field Composite EVM 1 Clrw
283. l LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_10_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_15_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_20_0_MHz xml LTE UL Used abbreviations BC band class UL uplink DL downlink TTA Telecommunications Technology Association Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately e Start and stop frequency e RBW e VBW e Sweep time e Sweep points Reference level Attenuator settings Limit values Via the sweep list you define the ranges and their settings For details on settings refer to Sweep List dialog box on page 111 For details on defining the limits masks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The following rules apply to ranges e The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz e The individual ranges must not overlap but need not directly follow one another The maximum number of ranges is 20 e A minimum of three ranges is mandatory R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis pme MMpro M e The reference range cannot be deleted it is marked in blue color e The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency e The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center f
284. l UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 301 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 310 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband UO the source can also be configured here Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 306 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 301 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut D
285. l lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio communication system The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this modification With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID CHAN2 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 103 See Channel Bandwidth span gt 0 on page 121 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio transmission system If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the band widths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value With SENSe source POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ACH 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 103 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth A
286. lection and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value one of the predefined limit lines is selected Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Power gt 33 28 0 33 P233 28 28 P 33 0 P 28 RST 0 7 2 3 4 CAL Culate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 CALCulate MARKer subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF ccccceccceesseeceeccceceecesesssceceacceesugeeseseeeeseaeeesseseessaeees 211 CAL Culatesn MARKer lt im gt MAXIMUM BEE 211 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT se nesaa sensn snas nest saa 212 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK nnne nennen 212 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMANimumbRlcGHt esee enne nsns sens aan 212 GALCulatesmnMARKersm MINim m LEF T aic tarn it tt iara teer no nent xe tnr any degen 213 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT seen nn nnne nasse nnn sni 213 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eese essent nnne 214 CALCulate nz M bkercmmz MiNimumbRIGHt esses sanis aiii 214 CALGulate n MARKer mo STATe 22 22 inttr cootra ida 214 CAL Culate nz M b kercmz TRACE ssec sssen si rae isis sa seien iiis 215 CAbGOulatecm MARKE SmS OG EE 215 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMitslGTaATel eene 216 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSlZO eese san eser esse sitis aak inaina 216 CALC ulate lt i gt
287. line with a specific transmission standard the bandwidth speci fied by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 274 Adjust Ref Lvl span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal the softkey is activated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path will not be overloaded and the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal band width the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the ref erence level If the measured channel power is equal to the reference level the signal path cannot be overloaded Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 279 Adjust Settings Occupied Bandwidth Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector
288. llation of the modulated signal at symbol level The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single PCG You can select a specific channel and PCG with the Select softkey A Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 47 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis 6 1 3 9 Symbol Constellation e 1 Clrw A Fig 6 10 Channel Constellation result display for QPSK modulated signal The R amp S FSV K82 supports BPSK QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation schemes The modulation scheme itself depends on the channel type Refer to chapter 6 4 1 1 Relationship Between Channel and Modulation Type on page 154 for further infor mation In case of BPSK the constellation points are located on the x axis For the QPSK and 16QAM schemes the constellation points are located on neither axis Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONStellation see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows the EVM on symbol level The x axis represents the symbols and the y axis shows the EVM in The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single PCG You can select a specific channel and PCG with the Select on page 79 softkey EVM vs Symb
289. lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 207 To define all limits in one step CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe on page 208 PMin PMax Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Defines the level limits for each power class The range always starts at 200 dBm INF and always stops at 200 dBm INF These fields cannot be modified If more than one Power Class is defined the value of PMin must be equal to the value of PMax of the last Power Class and vice versa Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit but must be lower than the upper limit Ne WE Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum on page 209 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum on page 209 Sweep List Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask See Sweep List on page 110 Add Remove Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined Up to four power classes can be defined The number of active power classes affects the availability of the items of the Used Power Classes dropdown menu Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 207 Bandclass Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to select a specific bandclass For a list of predefined bandclasses refer to the Bandclass softkey in the
290. lt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt lt RBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Type FilterType gt lt VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth gt lt Detector gt Detector lt Detector gt lt Sweep Mode SweepMode lt Amplitude gt lt ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value gt lt RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value gt lt Preamplifier State State gt lt Amplitude gt lt Range gt Time SweepTime gt Table 6 11 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand FileFormatVersion 1 0 0 0 Yes Date YYYY MM DD Date in ISO 8601 format No HH MM SS Name lt string gt Name of the standard Yes Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No Application SA K72 K82 Name of the application No LinkDirection Name Downlink Uplink Yes None ShortName DL UL No Reference Yes Power Method TX Channel Power Yes TX Channel Peak Power Reference lt string gt No Channel Further Information Table 6 12 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand StartPower Value power in dBm gt The start power must be equal Yes to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power value of the first range is 200 Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value power in dBm gt The stop
291. lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINIMUM RIGHT A 196 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese nennen rennen 196 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersin gt X 3 ire ta tro rure Be cu rv ce Aiea 198 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz X REI ative AAA 198 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamatrker stmo Y E 198 GALGulate n DELTamarkersm ES TATe chau tn eret ra tenen en tbt rte rentre rrr 197 CALOCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHoOw essen 223 CAL Culate lt n gt FEED cosa ie 182 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute cocoa eene 199 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHamnel ABSolute STA TB enne 200 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHamel RESUlb eene nennen nnn nennen 201 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel ABSolute cnn canino CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate channel RELative esee CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATEe a GALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe ertt rrt tn ttt erret erro GAL Culate n gt ElMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIM S ooo cnn ton onerare err aan GALGulate n LIMitskz ESPectrum MOBD
292. lways selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default num ber of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position 6 4 4 RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to ach ieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 236 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04
293. ly focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maxi mum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Remote command ESP RANG3 INS BEF see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert on page 261 Insert after Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range The range numbers of all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Remote command ESP RANGI INS AFT see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert on page 261 Delete Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Deletes the currently focused range if possible The range numbers are updated accordingly For further details refer to chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt DELete on page 258 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Symmetric Setup Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask If activated the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed Th
294. m d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Setan external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Setthe Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In screen B the result summary is displayed Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSV always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the result summary by default shown in screen B Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 5 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option K83 This section explains basic CDMA2000 mobile station tests using a setup with a signal generator e g an R amp S SMU It describes how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings The measurements are performed with an R amp S FSV equipped with the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option K83 As the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option also supports the CDMA2000 Standard the examples are performed on a CDMA2000 signal General Test Setup The measurements are performed with the following
295. m peak power 19 25 dBm CREST factor 13 69 dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the mea sured peak power in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Suffix n irrelevant Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 125 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe Value This command defines the level range for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe command CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 10dB to 200dB RST 100dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB Manual operation See x Axis Range on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel Value This command defines the reference level for the x axis of the mea
296. m Emission Mask measurement Manual operation See Meas Start Stop on page 120 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated num ber of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the pre vious results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual op
297. mand defines the minimum value of the y axis for the selected result display Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Y Axis Minimum on page 82 7 5 INSTrument Subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed numbers INS T men SELEC E 243 NS Tiumen MO EO oscila 243 T 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 7 6 2 2 7 6 2 3 7 6 2 4 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 6 7 6 2 7 7 6 1 SENSe Subsystem INSTrument SELect lt Mode gt Parameters lt Mode gt BC2K This command switches to the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode R amp S FSV K82 option INSTrument NSELect lt Mode gt Parameters lt Mode gt 10 This command switches to the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode R amp S FSV K82 option SENSe Subsystem The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer In accord ance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENSe is optional which means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences Note that most commands in the SENSe subsystem are
298. markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe State This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window m irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters State ON OFF RST
299. maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 300 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 300 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop freq
300. meaning ful if the signal does not contain power control For signals with enabled power control use the Pilot Channel setting since the pilot channel is not subject to power control under any circumstances Remote command SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 249 Time Phase Estimation Result Settings Actives or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels as to the pilot channel If deactivated or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the cal culation does not take place and dashes instead of values are displayed as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 251 Normalize Result Settings Activate this parameter to eliminate the DC offset from the signal By default the parameter is deactivated Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 251 Code Domain Overview MS mode only Result Settings If enabled both branches are displayed at once for a code domain power measure ment see chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 35 Otherwise only the selected branch and the result summary are displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower OVERview on page 248 Display Config This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display configu ration The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for measurements in the code domain Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measure
301. ment cccccccccnnnoccncnnccnonononoconcninon 125 126 Set Count RO 64 settings Channel Table Settings K82 ssssse 65 Demodulation Settings K82 ES Demodulation Settings K83 IQ Capture Settings K Result Settings K82 is Settings Overview K82 Signal Channel Power V iais Signal Source Hle ruv mr 94 Remote cortrol iss io erect d ses e end cs 306 of Adj Chan remote control m A cavities cn ense las desde Rr C A MR REDE of Samples remote control ssus of TX Chan m of TX Chan remote control ssss Power Bandwidth AAA Power Bandwidth remote control COMter ET Marker 0 1 TE EE 0 1 RBW remote control 0 1 SPAM etes 0 1 Span remote control nns 0 1 Demod BW IK nete 0 5 FI RBW redet 0 5 RBW remote control 5 SPAM eerie 0 5 Span remote control 0 5 Demod BW K7 ACER ADS ROl ET ACLR Abs Rel remote control s ACLR Ref Setting remote control ACLR Ref Spacing remote control 280 Add Cliannel K82 viii Pet 69 Adjust Ref Level a e 100 110 Adjust Ref Level remote control 279 Adjust Ref EVI ite creen dee 121 Adjust Settings remote c
302. ments Result Display Configuration Definition Code Domain Power Code Domain Power result display in relative or absolute scal ing MS mode only for the selected branch Channel Table Channel occupancy table Power vs PCG Power of the selected channel versus all PCGs MS mode only for the selected branch Result Summary Code Domain Error Power Results in a table Code Domain Error Power result display MS mode only for the selected branch Composite EVM RMS Averaged error between the test signal and the ideal reference signal Peak Code Domain Error Projection of the maximum error between the test signal and the reference signal MS mode only for the selected branch Channel Constellation Channel Constellation result display EVM vs Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display Composite Constellation Composite Constellation result display Power vs Symbol Power of the selected channel and of the selected PCG versus all symbols Channel Bitstream Display of demodulated bits For details on the displayed results and default settings refer to chapter 6 1 3 Code Domain Analysis Results on page 38 You can configure the result displays via the Result Settings on page 74 dialog box Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements v Screen A active Result Diagram for Screen A 8 Code Domain Power Power vs Symbol Channel Table
303. meric value gt RST 200 CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm See PMin PMax on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum Level This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always start at 200 dBm i e the first lower limit can not be set If more than one power class is in use the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous power class Suffix n irrelevant CALCulate Subsystem lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric_value gt RST 200 for class1 otherwise 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the fac tory set values are restored Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the default setting CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue lt Power gt This command activates the manual limit line se
304. mode Remote command SENSe CDPower PNOFfset on page 248 Multi Carrier Demod Settings BTS mode Activates or deactivates the Multi Carrier mode The mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows the measurement on one carrier out of a multi carrier sig nal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 231 Enhanced Algorithm Demod Settings BTS mode Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter on page 71 are deactiva ted the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 233 Multi Carrier Filter Demod Settings BTS mode Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier sig nals If both the Enhanced Algorithm on page 71 and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactiva ted the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 232 Filter Type Demod Settings BTS mode Selects the filter type if Multi Carrier Filter on page 71 is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and a RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the
305. mum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig nificantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 279 Spectrum Emission Mask Performs a comparison of the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified in the 1xEV DO specification Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 234 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 206 Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the Sweep List dialog box Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask After a preset the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters For each range you can change the parameters listed below To insert or delete ranges use the Insert Before Range Insert After Range Delete Range softkeys The measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box Edit Sweep List Close Sweep List softkey see Close Sweep List on page 114 The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be availa ble perman
306. n remote control Reload K82 Res BW m Res BW remote control et Res BW Auto remote control Res BW Manual remote control Restore Default Tables K82 sss Restore Standard Files i Result Settings K82 iii E EE Save As Standard Save As Standard remote control Save Evaluation Uist ecc permis Save Evaluation List remote control a e Une EE Search Lim Off remote control Search Limits remote control Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Select 1 2 94 5 ertt e e Peres Select CH PCG K82 Select TRACE A A Select Trace remote control sss 283 Set CP Reference miii reads rre tte Set Standard remote control a Iu EE Settings Overview K82 sssini iiris Show Peaks Show Peaks remote control Single Meas remote control ssssse Single Sweep remote control ids Sont IK82 1 ii ere Pe rei ee Span Man al 2 err n renes Span Manual remote control S Span RBW Auto 50 3 enr Span RBW Manual ertt tenen Spectrum Emission Mask d SAM Start remote control rere Start Frequency remote control ix Stepsize Standatd 2 cementerio Stepsize Standard remote control Stepsize Sweep Points
307. n the code domain power analysis The value can only be read once The possible events are described in the table below Example STAT QUES SYNC EVEN Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO Bit Definition 0 Not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons e Incorrectly set frequency e Incorrectly set level e Incorrectly set scrambling code e Incorrectly set values for Q INVERT or SIDE BAND INVERT Invalid signal at input 2 Not used 3to4 Not used 5 Incorrect Pilot Symbol This bit is set when one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible reasons e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the WCDMA signal e One or more code channels has a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR Oneor more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 6to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 TRACe Subsystem The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument s internal trace memory TRACe Subsystem TRACe lt n gt DA
308. nal power of a single channel with 1 2288 MHz bandwidth over a single trace The displayed results are based on the root mean square The configuration is according to the CDMA2000 requirements Beneath the measurement screen the bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed The other screen elements match that of the screen of the Spectrum Analyzer mode The default settings are in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications Setting Default Value Frequency Span 2MHz ACP Standard 1xEV DOO MC1 Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 54 6 1 4 2 6 1 4 3 Measurements and Result Displays Setting Default Value Number of adjacent channels 0 Adjacent Channel Power On For details on the softkeys of the Signal Channel Power measurement refer to the Power softkey in the Measurement menu Adjacent Channel Power The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyses the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX chan nel The number of TX channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class Beneath the measurement screens the bandwidth and power of the TX channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are displayed The default settings are in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications Setting Default value Adjacent Channel Power On ACP Standard 1xEV DOO MC1 Numb
309. nal trigger port for example Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG HIGH Manual operation See Trigger Out on page 150 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual SYSTem DISPlay UPDate State In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If Switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote control Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON 8 Status Reporting System of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 Detailed information on the status registers of the base system is given in the base unit description In this section only the new and altered status registers its for the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 are described The R amp S FSV K82 uses the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Although this register is provided by the base system the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option K82 uses different bits and definitions The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains information on the error situa tion in the code domain analysis of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possi
310. nd the refer ence signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot chan nel is active Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the signal gener ator trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings e Frequency 878 49 MHz e Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 e Link direction Downlink Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 22 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Startthe Peak Code Domain Error measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A C Select the Peak Code Domain Error softkey and start the measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 0 dB
311. ned in Ref Level on page 62 Freq Center frequency defined in Center on page 62 Att Attenuation Channel Channel with spreading factor PCG Slot Power Ref Reference used for power results SymbRate Symbol rate of the current channel Overview of all measurement settings You can easily display an overview of all measurement settings using the Settings Overview softkey In addition to the information in the diagram header each screen title contains dia gram specific trace information Screen focus One of the screens has a blue frame indicating the focus The screen focus can be changed just like in the base system The settings for trace statistics and markers can only be changed for the focussed screen Furthermore the focussed screen can be set to full screen for details see the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Measurements and Result Displays 6 1 2 Configuring the Display 1 Selectthe Display Config softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer menu 2 Select the tab for the screen you want to configure A D 3 Select the Screen X active option to display the selected screen Tip SCPI command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 236 4 Select the required result diagram to be displayed in the selected screen Tip SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 5 Press Close To select a predefined display configuration You can retrieve previously stored display configurations and thus easily
312. nel in the following order channel type code class code numbers radio configuration gt absolute level relative level timing offset phase offset Value Description Range Unit channel type channel type 2 13 0 PICH 1 SYNC 2 PCH 3 TDPICH 4 APICH 5 ATD PICH 6 BCH 7 CPCCH 8 CACH 9 CCCH 10 CHAN 11 INACTIVE 12 PDCCH 13 PDCH code class code class of the channel 2 7 2 corresponds to the lowest spreading factor 4 symbol rate 307 2 ksps 7 corresponds to the highest spreading factor 128 symbol rate 9 6 ksps lt radio config gt radio configuration For deactivated Auto Search 0 special channels 1 to 5 data channels 10 QPSK 20 8PSK 30 16QAM For activated Auto Search 1 RC 1 and 2 3 RCs 3 to 5 and 10 PDCH lt absolute level gt absolute power level of the channel 7 dBm relative level relative power level of the channel referred to either Total or Pilot dB power R amp S FSV K82 K83 Remote Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis Value Description Range Unit timing offset referred to the pilot channel S phase offset referred to the pilot channel rad The sorting of the channels is according to these rules 1 All detected special channels 2 Data channels in ascending order by code class and within the code class in asc
313. next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value Manual operation See Next Peak Mode on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary CALCulate Subsystem If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value Manual operation See Next Min Mode on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value Manual operation See Next Min on page 90 See Next Min Mode on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK T
314. nfiguration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 HARE Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 52 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis AAA RE EE U J Qn ie AA n MJ f wg dc C n u 6 1 3 15 Phase Error vs Chip e 1 Cirw 128 Chips Chip 1535 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calculation is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the PCG of a spe cial channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference of the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol Symbol Magnitude Error e 1 Clrw CERES 3 Sym Sym 23 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM MAGN see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To qu
315. nformation for the R amp S Digital UO Inter face R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz Other Commands Referenced in this Manual lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example INP DIO CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Connected Device on page 94 See Digital IQ Info on page 94 INPut DIQ RANGe AUTO State If enabled the digital input
316. nge 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 10 0 MHz Example ESP RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz Manual operation See VBW on page 112 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNt This command returns the number of defined ranges Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Example ESP RANG COUNt Returns the number of defined ranges SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt DELete This command deletes the specified range The range numbers are updated accord ingly The reference range cannot be deleted A minimum of three ranges is manda tory SENSe Subsystem Suffix range 1 20 range Example ESP RANG4 DEL Deletes range 4 Manual operation See Delete Range on page 114 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE lt Type gt This command sets the filter type for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Type NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters PULSe EMI 6dB filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet Example ESP RANG1 FILT TYPE RRC Sets the RRC filter type for range 1 Manual operation See Filter Type on page 112 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt rang
317. nnel 3 to 0 35 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 105 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX channel Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the TX channel 3 to 0 35 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel State This command activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ACH ON Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ALT3 ON Activates the weighting filter for alternate channel 3 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 105 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified TX channel SENSe Subsystem Suffix channel 1 18 the TX channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT CHA3 O
318. nt results leads to a too low level indication and should therefore be avoided The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea sured Reference level The Adjust Settings softkey does not influence the reference level It can be adjus ted separately using the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey see Adjust Ref Lvl on page 100 7 Remote Commands of the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis This chapter describes the remote commands specific to the CDMA2000 Analysis options R amp S FSV K82 K83 The abbreviation CDMA stands for the operating mode of this option For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 7 1 Notation on page 179 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 3 7 3 1 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 7 7 8 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the corre sponding subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the specific commands described in chapter 7 2 CALCulate Subsystem on page 181 e DISPlay subsystem e FORMat subsystem e NITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e MMEM subsystem e OUTput subsystem e SENSe subsystem except for the specific commands described in chapter 7 6 SENSe Subsystem on page 243 e TRIGger subsystem NotatiON
319. obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 267 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 267 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values O or 1 are set one Sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count O default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 284 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected dur ing one sweep e Entry via rotary knob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or
320. ode Domain Power CDP result display absolute XPOW CDP RAT Code Domain Power CDP result display relative XTIM CDP BSTReam Channel Bitstream result display XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation Composite Constellation result display XPOW CDEP Code Domain Error Power CDEP result display XTIM CDP ERR CTABle Channel Table result display XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain Peak Code Domain Error result display XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary Result Summary result display XTIM CDP MACCuracy Composite EVM result display XTIM CDP PVSLot Power versus Power Control Group PCG result display XTIM CDP PVSYmbol Power versus Symbol result display XTIM CDP SYMB CONStellation Channel Constellation result display XTIM CDP SYMB EVM Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude Result display of the symbol magnitude error XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASe Result display of the symbol phase error XTIMe CDP CHIP MAGNitude Result display magnitude error versus chip XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 183 7 2 2 CAL Culate Subsystem Result display phase error versus chip RST XPOW CDP RAT screen A XTIM CDP ERR SUMM screen B Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP MACC Selects the Composite EVM result display for measurement screen 2 Usage SCPI confirmed Mode CDMA Manual operation See Code Power on page 76 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Subsys
321. odes Channel Table Settings Name BPC RC4 Description Both Paths 6 Channels RC4 F SYNC F PCH F TDPICH 9 128 CHAN 10 128 CHAN 11 128 CHAN 15 128 CHAN 17 128 25 128 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Add Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Inserts a new channel below the selected one For a description of the parameters of the channel refer to the New Copy Edit on page 67 softkey The default values for a new channel are ChannelType CHAN Walsh SF 0 64 Sym Rate ksps automatically calculated RC 3 5 BTS mode only Mapping MS mode only l Power dB automatically calculated State Off DomainConflict automatically calculated The R amp S FSV automatically checks for conflicts between two active channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 228 Delete Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel without further notice Meas New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Initiates a measurement in Auto Search mode see Channel Search Mode on page 66 The measurement results are applied to the active channel table The active channel table is overwritten without further notice The softkey is only available if the
322. off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Value RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all Manual operation See RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual on page 82 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level Manual operation See RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto on page 82 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC Manual operation See Input AC DC on page 84 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status I
323. off has expired RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt Value This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated trig gering SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1 3 range Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 us Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 125 SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one Sweep Note For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 147 SENSe SWEep TIME Time This command defines the sweep time The range depends on the frequency span Parameters Time refer to data sheet RST automatic Example SWE TIME 10s Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 108 See Sweeptime Manual on page 130 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State In realtime mode this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms In analyzer mode this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwidth settings If SENSe S
324. oj o oj o oj o of o oj D oj o ofj o of o oj o oj D oj oo soso ol o o fe oo so o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o eo o o o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o ofj o oj o ofj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o oj o o ooj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj o of o oj o oj o oj oo ooo oj jo oo of jo o o oj jo oo of o oo ofj jo o o of jo oo oj jo ooo PRA PEPA no o olo oo ofj jo oo ojo oao oj jo oo ojo o o gj len joo ooj ooo A A SS SS EA AE aja aao ojo oao ofj j ln SS jo ono ojoon ojoo ooj ooa L LB PB bL 5 L noaoo hooaognooocnmooonooaognmooognaooonoooaoE 0011000 1011000 0111000 1111000 000100 1000100 0100100 1100100 0010100 1010100 0110100 1110100 0001100 1001100 0101100 1101100 0011100 1011100 0111100 1111100 0000010 1000010 0100010 1100010 0010010 1010010 0110010 1110010 unito 1001010 0101010 1101010 0011010 1011010 0111010 1111010 0000110 1000110 0100110 4100110 0010110 1010110 0110110 1110110 0001110 1001110 0101110 1101110 0011110 1011110 0111110 1111110 Fig 10 2 Code table for base spreading factor 128 part1 54 so iit 10 T4 42 106 26 so 58 122 70 38 102 22 96 se 113
325. ol e 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 32 Sym Stop Sym 383 Fig 6 11 EVM vs Symbol result display Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 48 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis The number of symbols is in the range from 6 to 384 and can be calculated like this Number of symbols Number of chips in one PCG ChannelSF K with Number of chips in one PCG 1536 Channel SF 4 8 16 32 64 or 128 K 1 for Antenna Diversity OFF K 2 for Antenna Diversity OFF This calculation thus takes into account the results of a channel for a power control group Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these chan nels do not contain data Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see CALCulatecn FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 10 Composite Constellation This result display shows the constellation of the modulated signal at chip level For each of the 1536 chips a constellation point is displayed in the diagram The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single PCG You can select a specific PCG with the Select on page 79 softkey Composite Constellation ei Clrw D Fig 6 12 Composite Constellation result display
326. ontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed screen A shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error screen A is always the Code Domain Power result display Screen B is always the Result Summary display For more information on the display concept refer to chapter 6 1 1 Display Concept on page 36 D By default the R amp S FSV K83 displays two measurement screens After a preset Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency Press the SETUP key Press the Reference Int Ext softkey to switch to an external reference Screen A again shows the Code Domain Power measurement and screen B the result summary After the synchronization of the reference frequencies of the devices the frequency error should now be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced 1 Onthe signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer screen R amp S FSV K82 K83 Measur
327. ontrol 2422 1 278 AllMarker Off casaca 89 148 A M 133 APD remote control Se eres 220 ASCIUFIS e E 116 ASCII File Export remote control 312 Auto remote Control 22 treten 289 y Vr 91 Bandclass 101 119 CIN remote control nnns 187 189 C No remote control aiiis 187 189 Cancel K82 WEE 69 CCDF asa 121 CCDF remote control 219 220 Center Mkr Freg escitas ree redeas 91 Center Mkr Freq remote control 186 CF Stepsize remote control sss 270 Ch Power ACLR 22er terere en 100 Chan Fw nii eret e 107 Chan Pwr Hz remote control ssssse 188 Channel Bandwidth 2 rrr 121 Channel Bandwidth remote control 274 275 Channel Settings ecrit tre n 102 Channel Spacing remote control 280 281 Channel Table Settings K82 ssss 65 Clear Write e Code Domain Analyzer esee 100 Cont Meas remote control sssssss 312 Continue Single Sweep remote control 310 312 Continuous Sweep remote control 312 Coupling Ratio 2 rrt enis 141 CP ACP MC ACLR remote control 187 189 CP AGLR Gohfig e Cr erede ls 101 sp 133 sspe ii ete 133 AB ME 133 GBA oU eo de mde Sette 133
328. or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC fil ter is activated For further details refer to chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 266 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 255 SENSe JESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 255 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 256 Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings Power Classes xj Used Power Classes All E Power Class PMin lt P lt PMax Power Class 1 wr 63 5 dBm Sweep List Power Class 2 63 5 dBm 40 0 dBm Sweep List Power Class 3 40 0 dBm wr Sweep List Add Remove Used Power Classes Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Choose the power classes to be used from this dropdown menu It is only possible to select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power classes together Only power classes for which limits are defined are available for selection Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used The limits assigned to that power class are applied see PMin PMax on page 119 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass
329. or multi carrier measure ments Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT OFF Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Multi Carrier Filter on page 71 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency Frequency This command sets the cut off frequency for the RRC filter Parameters Frequency Range 0 1 MHz to 2 4 MHz RST 1 25 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT COFR 1 5MHZ Sets the cut off frequency to 1 5 MHz Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Cut Off Frequency on page 72 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF lt RollOffFactor gt This command sets the roll off factor for the RRC filter CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt RollOffF actor gt Range 0 01 to 0 99 RST 0 02 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT ROFF 0 05 Sets the roll off factor to 0 05 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Roll Off Factor on page 72 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrie
330. order lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt The number of displayed value pairs corresponds to the Capture Length Peak Code Domain Error The command returns 2 values for each channel in the following order lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt The number of displayed value pairs corresponds to the Capture Length Composite EVM The command returns 2 values for each channel in the following order slot number gt level value in gt slot number gt level value in 96 TRACe Subsystem The number of displayed value pairs corresponds to the Capture Length EVM vs Symbol The command returns one value for every symbol in the following order value in symbol 0 gt value in 96 symbol 1 gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor With transmit diversity activated the number of values is reduced to half Spreading factor Number of values 128 12 64 24 32 48 16 96 8 192 4 384 Power vs Symbol The command returns one value for every symbol in the following order lt value in dBm symbol 0 lt value in dBm symbol 1 gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor With transmit diversity activated the number of values is reduced to half
331. orrelated power between the measured and the ideal reference sig nal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the refer ence signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot chan nel is active Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the signal gener ator trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings e Frequency 833 49 MHz e Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 e Link direction Uplink Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 33 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and activate the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Startthe Peak Code Domain Error measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Peak Code Domain Error option and start the measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a
332. ow The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter Manual operation See Auto on page 141 See Narrow on page 141 SENSe Subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 01 Manual operation See Span RBW Manual on page 142 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE lt FilterType gt This command selects the type of resolution filter For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 159 and chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 When changing the filter type the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type 5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORMal
333. ower CODE on page 244 Code Order Result Settings Sets the sorting of the channels for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays Hadamard order By default the codes are sorted in Hadamard order i e in ascending order You can see the power of each code in this way there is no distinction between channels apparent If there is a channel covering several codes the display shows the individual power of each code Example for base spreading factor of 64 0 64 1 64 2 64 63 64 Bit Reverse order Bundles the channels with concentrated codes i e all codes of a channel are next to one another In this way you can see the total power of a con centrated channel Example for base spreading factor of 64 0 64 32 64 16 64 48 64 8 64 40 64 15 64 47 64 31 64 63 64 For further details on the code order refer to the Hadamard and BitReverse Code Tables in the Appendix on page Remote command SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 247 Code Power Result Settings Selects the y axis scaling for the Code Domain Power result display e Absolute scaling shows the code power in dBm e Relative scaling shows the code power in dB You can set the reference in the Power Reference on page 76 field Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 Pilot Power MS mode only Result Settings Displays the pilot power in absolute or relative values Remote command SENS
334. parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage lt 1 4 gt TYPE VIDeo LINear Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or Several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 3 1 CALCulate Subsystem For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description Boolean This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 numeric value num These keywords mark parameters which may be ente
335. played in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters How to Use the Help System The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and general help P To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on th
336. ple POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100 kHz Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent channel 1 ALT 1 from 40 kHz to 100 kHz In consequence the spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adja cent channels is increased by the factor 100 40 2 5 ALT2 150 kHz ALT3 200 kHz ALTA 250 kHz Manual operation See Spacing on page 104 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 14 kHz to 20 GHz RST 20 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC CHAN 25kHz Manual operation See Spacing on page 104 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt Number This command selects the number of carrier signals The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 189 Parameters Number 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH TXCH COUN 3 SENSe Subsystem Manual operation See of TX Chan on page 102 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth Percentage This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement see SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 278 Parameters Percentage 10 to 99 9PCT RST 99PCT Example POW BWID 95PCT Manual operation
337. plications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 6 4 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 157 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps Manual operation See Clear Write on page 86 See Max Hold on page 87 See Min Hold on page 87 See Average on page 87 See View on page 87 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t trace Parameters State ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Manual operation See Blank on page 159 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scal
338. power must be equal Yes to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Yes Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or Relative Table 6 13 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Index 0 19 Inde XE s are continuous Yes and have to start with O Name lt string gt Name of the range Only if Referen ceChannel con tains a name and the range is the reference range Short lt string gt Short name of the range No Name ChannelType TX Adjacent Yes WeightingFilter Only if Referen cePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the ref erence range Type RRC CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes Roll Off Factor 0 1 Excess bandwidth of the fil Only if the filter ter type is RRC Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start frequency in Hz Start value of the range Yes Stop frequency in Hz Stop value of the range Yes Further Information Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Limit dBm Hz dBm A Range must contain Yes dBc dBr dB exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nod
339. query The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem To obtain a correct result a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Parameters lt ResultType gt Manual operation CALCulate Subsystem Selects the marker ACPower CPOWer ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence separated by com mas Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the num ber of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE is set to REL the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB CPOWer Channel power measurement In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the query returns the power result for the reference range if this power reference type is selected With logarithmic scaling
340. r CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Marker CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 270 Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency The following range of values is allowed fmin s fstart lt fmax y Span min fmin fmax and SPAN pin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 272 Stop Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency The following range of values for the stop frequency is allowed fmin SPAN min s fstop s fmax f min gt f max and Span min are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 273 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offse
341. r new spacing value old spacing value Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal channel spacing A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing ALT1 ALT2 causes a change by the same factor in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Example In the default setting the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ is set to 40 kHz the spacing of all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 If starting from the default setting the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ALT4 is set to 150 kHz the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 1 5 to result in 180 kHz ALT5 210 kHz ALT6 240 kHz ALT7 If a ACLR or MC ACLR measurement is started all settings according to the stand ard including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set and can be adjusted afterwards Remote command ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel on page 281 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 280 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel on page 281 Names Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define user specific channel names for each channel The names defined here
342. r 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Marker Norm Delta on page 88 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 89 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix n Selects the measurement window m depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters Trace 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Marker to Trace on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis If marker 2 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker it is switched to marker mode Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 88 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 89 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marke
343. r 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window m marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command defines the step size of the rotary knob for marker or delta marker value changes It only takes effect in manual operation The marker step size is unavailable for statistical measurements Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt m gt irrelevant CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard step size corresponds to space between two pixels POINts step size corresponds to space between two measured values number of measured values is defined via the SENSe lt n gt SWEep POINts command see SENSe SWEep POINts on page 288 RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the measured value step size Manual operation See Stepsize Standard on page 149 See Stepsize Sweep Points on page 149 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a marker The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mod
344. r FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type to be used in multi carrier mode You can set the parameters for the RRC filter with the CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 232 and CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 232 commands Parameters Type LPASs RCC RST LPAS Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Filter Type on page 71 See Roll Off Factor on page 72 See Cut Off Frequency on page 72 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo State This command activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm for the filters in multi carrier mode Parameters State ON OFF RST ON CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR MALG OFF Deactivates the enhanced algorithm Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Enhanced Algorithm on page 71 CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement Measurement This command selects the measurement type Parameters Measurement ACLR CCDF CDPower ESPectrum OBWidth POWer ACLR Adjacent Channel Power measurement with predefined settings according to the CDMA2000 standard
345. r RF Measurements K82 If measuring according to the IBW method Fast ACLR Off the bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically Since all adjacent channels often have the same bandwidth the other alternate channels are set to the bandwidth of the adjacent channel when it is changed Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths For details on available channel filters see chapter 6 4 5 Selecting the Appropriate Fil ter Type on page 159 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 274 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel on page 274 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate channel on page 275 ACLR Reference Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Select the transmission channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced TX Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a refer ence channel Max Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a refer ence channel Lowest amp Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent channels Remote command S
346. r to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP Queries the result of the adjacent channel power measurement Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 108 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and if required switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded Since the measure ment bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measurements the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still signifi cantly below the reference level If the measured channel power equals the reference level the signal path is not overloaded Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power Manual operation See Adjust Ref Lvl on page 100 See Adjust Ref Lvl span gt 0 on page 121 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for the relative measurement Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE Manual operation See Set CP Reference on page 109 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO Channel
347. r video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 288 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 288 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 288 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep ing e Sweep on page 140 e FFT on page 140 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filt
348. rator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 e Link direction Uplink Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and activate the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option 3 Start the measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey 4 Setthe center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 878 49 MHz Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 5 Setthe reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 6 Select a bandclass a Press the Bandclass softkey and select BandClass 0 800 MHz Cellular Band from the list On the screen the spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation table shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur 5 4 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Fre quency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single Power Control Group PCG It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non ad
349. re quency In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Symmetrical ranges O You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings e the ranges to the left and right of the center range are defined symmectrically In the Sweep List menu select the Symmetrical Setup softkey to activate symmetrical setup mode The current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges For details see Symmetric Setup on page 115 Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for Fast SEM mode see chap ter 6 4 12 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 172 6 4 12 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements In order to improve the performance of the R amp S FSV for spectrum emission mask measurements a F
350. re CDPower BTS CTABle NAME lt ChannelTable gt This command selects a channel table for editing or creating To select a command for analysis use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters ChanTableName string name of the channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure C DPower BTS CTABle RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the channel table Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt ChannelTable gt This command selects a predefined channel table Parameters ChanTableName lt string gt name of the channel table RST RECENT Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Channel Search Mode on page 66 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe State This command activates or deactivates the multi carrier mode CONFigure Subsystem Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates the multi carrier settings Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Multi Carrier on page 71 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the usage of a filter f
351. red as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value e DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e UP This keyword increments the parameter value DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result arbitrary block program data This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate Subsystem The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem Note that most commands in the CALCulate subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here CALCulate FEED Gubsvstem enm eene nnns 182 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Gubevstem eene 184 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual
352. reference power type is activated the dialog box is exten ded to define additional settings e TxBandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC fil ter is activated For further details refer to chapter 6 4 11 Ranges and Range Settings on page 171 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 266 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 255 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 255 SENSe JESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 256 List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings List Evaluation On Off List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the list evaluation Remote command Turning list evaluation on and off CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO on page 218 Querying list evaluation results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 292 Margin List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check peak search Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin on page 218 Show Peaks List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask In the diagram m
353. reference range Example ESP RRAN Returns the current position number of the reference range SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe Type This command sets the power reference type Parameters Type PEAK CPOWer PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method RST CPOWer Example ESP RTYP PEAK Sets the peak power reference type Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 115 SENSe BANDwidth subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution cnc 266 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO eeccccntntt tette 267 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT ecce 267 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO eeccncnt tette 268 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE ence enns 268 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VlDeo eccentric 268 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO eecnccetnttt tette teretes 269 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio ccce conocernos 269 IGENSeBANDwithlBulIDthVilDeoTebk tette tette na 269 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 5 S
354. rom the C NR SNinstrNsem backup folder to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Example ESP PRES REST Restores the originally provided XML files Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 120 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings as presettings in the specified XML file under C Nr sNinstrNsem backup Parameters lt FileName gt Example ESP PRES STOR WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass 31 39 xml Stores the settins in the PowerClass 31 39 xml file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory Manual operation See Save As Standard on page 120 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution Value This command sets the RBW value for the specified range SENSe Subsystem Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 30 0 kHz Example ESP RANG2 BAND RES 5000 Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz Manual operation See RBW on page 112 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo Value This command sets the VBW value for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 256 Suffix ra
355. rresponds to the highest spreading factor 128 symbol rate 9 6 ksps lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 127 signal level absolute or relative power depending on the setting see Power Reference dB ordBm Hadamard order power values for each code BitReverse order power values for combined channels power ID power detection 0 inactive channel 1 power of own antenna 2 alias power of own antenna 3 alias power of other antenna 4 alias power of own and other antenna to avoid alias power set the base spreading factor correctly Note To avoid alias power set the base spreading factor correctly The number of displayed data depends on the spreading factor In addition the struc ture of the output differs whether Hadamard or BitReverse code sorting order was selected In Hadamard order the different codes are output in ascending order together with their code power The number of output codes corresponds to the base spreading fac tor In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another and are therefore output in the class of the channel together with the consolidated channel power The maximum number of output codes or channels cannot be higher than the base spreading factor but decreases with every concentrated channel For further information refer to Base Spreading Factor on page 70 and Code Order on page 76 Code Domain Error
356. s 10 2 9 CodeClass Symbol Phase Error The comand returns the phase error in degrees of each symbol at the selected PCG The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 8 CodeClass 7 9 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 7 9 1 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Other Commands Referenced in this Manual The following commands are identical to those in the base unit and are included in this manual only because they are specifically referenced to here See also chapter 7 6 2 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual on page 252 and chapter 7 2 3 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Man ual on page 191 INP tcominmnands EE 300 TIRIG ger Command Seeria M 307 Other Referenced Commande 310 INPut commands INPut ATTenuation Value This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against dam age from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched
357. s command sets the marker to channel 0 64 Suffix n 1 4 window lt m gt 1 4 marker to be set to the pilot channel CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC MARK FUNC DICH Activates marker and positions it at pilot 0 64 CALC MARK Y Queries value of the relative Code Domain Power of the pilot channel Usage Event Mode CDMA Manual operation See F PICH BTS mode only on page 90 See PICH MS mode only on page 90 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE lt Mode gt This commands defines the method by which the channel power values are calculated from the current trace in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe MAXHold WRITe The channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu lated directly from the current trace MAXHold The power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algo rithm Example CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH Sets the Maxhold channel power mode Manual operation See Clear Write on page 108 See Max Hold on page 108 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If necessary the measurement is switched on prior to the
358. s selected the number of adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs is set to 0 If ACPower is selected the number of adjacent channels is set to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already The channel adjacent channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt MeasType gt ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement with a single carrier sig nal CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal equiv alent to adjacent channel power measurement with NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 MCACpower Channel adjacent channel power measurement with several car rier signals OBANdwidth OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth CN Measurement of carrier to noise ratio CNO Measurement of carrier to noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band width Example CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Switches on adjacent channel power measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TDPIch This command sets the marker to channel 16 128 Suffix n
359. s the Code Domain Power measurement and screen B the result summary After the synchronization of the reference frequencies of the devices the frequency error should now be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced 1 On the signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer screen Up to a frequency error of approximately 1 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSV is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message 2 Resetthe center frequency of the signal generator to 878 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSV Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 18 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 4 5 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of the test signal is re
360. sed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The following filter types are available e Normal 3dB Gaussian filters The Gaussian filters are set by default The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet e CISPR 6 dB filters MIL Std 6 dB filters Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel filters For details see chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 Channel filters do not support FFT mode e RRC filters For details see chapter 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 160 RRC filters do not support FFT mode e 5 Pole filters The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet 5 Pole filters do not support FFT mode Further Information 6 4 6 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are availa ble see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated Table 6 10 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFiLter 200 Hz CFiLter AO 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz
361. see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe on page 216 Stepsize Sweep Points Marker Stepsize Moves the marker or delta marker from one measured value to the next if the marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta softkeys see Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 147 If more measured values than mea surement points exist every single measured value is accessible and its value is dis played in the marker field The number of measured values is defined in the Sweep menu via the Sweep Points softkey This functionality is available for all base unit measurements with the exception of sta tistics APD and CCDF softkeys in the Measurement menu Remote command CALC MARK X SSIZ POIN see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe on page 216 Link Mkr1 and Delta1 The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1 so if the x axis value of the marker 1 is changed the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x position The link is off by default You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a ref erence trace This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 194 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 6 3 8
362. sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Other Commands Referenced in this Manual TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 64 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source IF power and RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV B160 For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency RFPower Power trigger at the first intermediate frequency TIME Time interval PSEN External power sensor requires R amp S FSV K9 option RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source Free Run on page 64 See Trigger Source External on page 64 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual 7 9 3 Other Referenced Commands
363. signal and an ideally gen erated reference signal and plots in a diagram The unit is dB The x axis represents the channel code number which corresponds to the base spreading factor The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel Since it is an error power active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single PCG It supports both Hada mard and BitReverse code sorting order MS mode the error power is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q Code mme eem emeng 1 Clrw Start Ch 0 4 Code Stop Ch 63 Fig 6 6 Code Domain Error Power result display in Hadamard code sorting order Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 44 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Start Ch 0 4 Code Stop Ch 63 Fig 6 7 Code Domain Error Power result display in BitReverse code sorting order Active and inactive data channels are defined via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 The power values of the active and inactive channels are shown in dif ferent colors In addition codes with alias power can occur These codes obtain power components originating either from a spreading factor higher than the base spreading factor or from the own and or another antenna as a result of transmit diversity The following colors are defined e Red selected channel Channel Code Number e Yellow active channe
364. siu qp 133 o repr bereiten 117 Default Couplitig sacro nnne 143 Default Settings nette 125 Default Settings remote control 220 222 D lete K82 Recette 70 Delete Channel K82 en D I Delete Range ninia dci 114 Delete Range remote control 258 Demodulation Settings K82 nd Demodulation Settings K83 sssse 73 Deviation Lin Log remote control 241 Display Config K82 s cit ewan tee 77 Edit ACLR Limit remote control 199 200 201 202 203 204 Edit Power Glasses emeret 118 Edit Reference Range ef 115 117 Edit Reference Range remote control 255 256 266 El Atten Mode Auto Man esse 83 135 F PICH KEE F TDPICH K82 m Fast ACLR On Off Fast ACLR On Off remote control 282 Filter Type Filter Type remote control Frequency Offset eee 62 80 129 Full Span remote control Gate Delay remote control Gate Length remote control usssse Gate Mode Lvl Edge remote control Gate RANGES i a eee nen re E tee nnn Gate Ranges remote control Gated Trigger On Off Gated Trigger remote control Grid BET Grid Abs Rel remote control IF Output IF Video remote control Input 50 Q 75 Q remote control
365. sk measurements is given in chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask on page 162 Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 310 MMEMor y STORe lt n gt LIST on page 312 Decim Sep Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Selects the decimal separator with floating point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs e g MS Excel in different languages The values decimal point and comma can be set Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 310 Edit Reference Range Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Settings Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is exten ded to define additional settings Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 e TxBandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates
366. smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary CALCulate Subsystem If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value Manual operation See Next Peak on page 89 See Next Peak Mode on page 89 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the
367. stics SCALe AUTO ONCE sess ree nennt EEEE EKE nnne 221 CAL Culate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe CALCulate n gt STATIsticS e E CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer GALGulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNLT inten rr trn hn rrr t te eros t rari GAL Culatesnz STATIstics SGALe Y el GALGulate n THRe shold rtr rt mre rni ren tree e nn ex Ipae A n LA TERR ER Rh GAL Gulatesn NIT POWBETFE roter titre ree nr erre eh ir RE E ERE ERR RR E FE ERE CONFigure CDPower B15 BCLass BANDCIASS nta rnt rone rn tien trt ee nen eg eee rene riri ta eaa 225 CONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle CATalog oet tenet e rnnt oce rrt rs 227 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMernt SES CONFigure CDPowerE BTS IGTABIe O E CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DAT A unter nne ae GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle DATA oh nr rrt ir ete rene hh er roro Rr EEN GONFigure CDPowerE BTS GTABle DELelte or toro reper per dere EX EFE ER ae D E Cete pere EP e sk vu GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME cnt tret rt eran rn ner rn rd eene RR GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle RES Tore ottenere ro tren neret er ierra CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect CONFigure CDPowerE BTSI CTABle S TATel ntt ertt rente e tnt CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARnier S TATe eterne nbn nnno CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer S TATe erar rn tnn rennen 232 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FI
368. surement diagram The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel command With the reference level offset lt gt O the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value 120dBm to 20dBm RST 20dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See x Axis Ref Level on page 122 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Value This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix n selects the screen Parameters Value 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See y Axis Min Value on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT Unit This command defines the scaling type of the y axis CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See y Unit Abs on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer Value This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probab
369. surement speed Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the input of the R amp S FSV Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GER GATE IN to the external trigger output of the signal generator Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 e Link direction Uplink Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 30 Measuring the Composite EVM 2 Activate the UDMA2000 MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select CDMA2000 BS Analysis 3 Enter the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A C Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the code doma
370. switch between different displays of measurement results 1 Select the Predefined tab in the Display Configuration dialog box The previously stored and default configurations are listed The current configura tion is displayed at the top of the dialog box 2 Select the required set of screen configurations 3 Press Apply To store the current display configuration You can store the current display configuration in the list of predefined settings in order to switch back to it later 1 Select the current display configuration at the top of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Ada The current display configuration is added to the list of predefined settings To remove a predefined display configuration You can remove one of the stored display configurations 1 Select the display configuration to be removed from the Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Remove The selected display configuration is removed from the list of predefined settings Measurements and Result Displays To restore the default display configurations You can restore the default set of predefined display configurations gt Inthe Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box click Restore 6 1 3 Code Domain Analysis Results The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for measurements in the code domain e Gode Domain POWER ici v Sa dn
371. t lt ReferencePower gt lt Method gt Method lt Method gt lt ReferencePower gt PowerClass Index n gt lt For contents of the PowerClass node see table 6 12 gt lt Define up to four PowerClass nodes gt lt PowerClass gt lt LinkDirection gt RS SEM ACP File The PowerClass element is structured as follows lt PowerClass Index n gt lt StartPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag true Value StartPowerValue gt lt StopPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Value StopPowerValue gt lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Limit Fail Mode lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Range Index n gt lt For contents of the Range node see table 6 13 gt lt Define up to twenty Range nodes gt lt Range gt lt PowerClass gt e The Range element is structured as follows Range Index n gt lt Name Name gt lt ChannelType gt Channel Type lt Channel Type lt WeightingFilter gt Further Information lt Type gt FilterType lt Type gt lt RollOffFactor gt Factor lt RollOffFactor gt lt Bandwith gt Bandwidth lt Bandwidth gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Start gt RangeStart lt Start gt lt Stop gt RangeStop lt Stop gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Limit gt lt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt lt Limit gt lt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt
372. t ia 62 80 129 ici EE 129 lm 129 Frequency CENNET p vance 62 80 127 Frequency mel rosiers tette ciere ga r seau gs 126 K82 K89 ositos 80 Frontend le EE 61 Full Scale Level Digital Baseband IQ remote control 302 Digital UO Interface remote control 303 Beas 94 H Hysteresis Lower Auto level miccional te 93 Upper Auto level 1 rettet 92 l IEC IEEE bus Command description rris 179 Impedance ior 137 Inactive Channel Threshold ER need men De c a 66 Inherent noise ele e coerente ueniet Input sample rate Ib Pozo RT EY Input Output menu r VE ici T IQ capture settings ER eer o dH ote 63 K key AMPT KB82 2 tte t ace os 81 AUTO SET K82 3 591 FREQ K82 K83 80 INPUT OUTPUT iiie oet tttm tte ke nee MEAS nc MKR K82 ge MKR EE SWEEP KB82 EE TRACE K82 sis TRIG K82 aciem aae Key INPUT OUTPUT crcire e etes 93 L level CI qe iii a 133 display range 122 123 124 132 133 PANIE ctrl 122 123 124 132 133 Level EE le E 62 81 131 Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control 303 Digital Qi M 94 limit ACER measurement EE 107 limit check ACER measurement iactat SEENEN 106 Long Code Gen Mode K83 remote control ssssses 247 Ip
373. t PTOTal gt Total power Ja cl dBm lt PPICh gt Pilot power Ja cl dBm lt RHO gt RHO 0 1 lt MACCuracy gt Composite EVM lt PCDerror gt Peak Code Domain Error dB Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 295 TRACe Subsystem Value Description Range Unit lt ACTive gt Number of active channels lt FERRor gt Frequency error Hz lt FERPpm gt Frequency error ppm lt TFRame gt Trigger to Frame Returns a 9 if the trigger is set to Free Run lt CERRor gt Chip rate error ppm lt IQOFfset gt IQ offset 96 IQIMbalance IQ imbalance lt SRATe gt Symbol rate ksps lt CHANnel gt Channel number lt SFACtor gt Spreading factor of the channel lt TOFFset gt Timing offset S returns a 9 if the timing phase offset measurement is switched off or the number of active channel exceeds 50 lt POFFset gt Phase offset rad returns a 9 if the timing phase offset measurement is switched off or the number of active channel exceeds 50 lt CDPRelative gt Relative to total or pilot power channel power Lach dBm lt CDPabsolute gt Absolute channel power Lach dB lt EVMRms gt Error vector magnitude RMS lt EVMPeak gt Error vector magnitude peak Tip Read out the modulation type with the command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 Power vs PCG The command returns 2 values for each channel in the following
374. t dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 113 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP on page 262 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Rel Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 113 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt on page 263 Rel Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Sweep List dialog box on page 111 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP on page 263 Close Sweep List Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Closes the Sweep List dialog box and updates the measurement results Insert before Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range The range numbers of the current
375. t included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11 e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chap
376. t that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 272 6 3 3 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Span menu for RF meas urements except for Power measurements Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Span Mantal e ti A AA a TATAKAS 130 SWeepume En TEE 130 Eje c E M 130 A pantie tl tesbaanatieste ienddehe asahteehs nn nimeentens 131 Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span The center frequency remains the same when you change the span The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 SpaNnmin S f span S f max fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 272 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is
377. te control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary see CALCulate lt n gt F T T ED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 Global Results Under Global Results the measurement results that concern the total signal that is all channels for the entire period of observation that is all PCGs are displayed e Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FSV The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSV and that of the device under test Frequency differences between the transmitter and receiver of more than 1 0 kHz impair synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 42 Measurements and Result Displays synchronized For further information on correcting the frequency error refer to chapter 4 4 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error on page 17 The frequency error is available in the units both Hz and ppm referred to the carrier frequency e Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchroniza
378. te lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 212 Next Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 194 Next Peak Mode Selects the mode of the Next Peak softkey This softkey is available for code domain measurements Three settings are available Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements e Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum left to the marker of the selected trace abs Sets the active marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the selected trace gt Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum right to the marker of the selected trace Remote command CALC MARK MAX LEFT lt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 211 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 194 CALC MARK MAX RIGH gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 195 CALC DELT MAX NEXT abs CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 212 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 194 F PICH BTS mode only Sets the marker to the F PICH channel The softkey is only available if the x axis of the active screen is a code axis This softk
379. tem The CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTGIRE Gu 184 CAL Culate nz M bkermmz FUNGCHonCENTer een en nennen nnns anas 186 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonbIcCH enne en nns enn ss nns nns san 186 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHon POWerMODE nennen nnns 187 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RE Gut 187 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUult PH 188 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzFUNGCHonb OWer GEI ect 189 CALC late lt n MARKer lt m gt FUNGtion TDPI Ch eene aE Ra 190 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult This command queries the results of the code domain measurement for the selected channel The channel is selected via the SENSe CDPower CODE command For a description of the result types refer to chapter 6 1 3 Code Domain Analysis Results on page 38 Suffix n 1 4 window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters Result CALCulate Subsystem SLOT PTOTal PPICh RHO MACCuracy PCDerror ACTive FERRor FERPpm CERRor TFRame I IQOFfset IQIMbalance SRATe CHANnel SFACtor TOFFset POFFset CDPabsolute CDPRelative EVMRms EVMPeak DMType SLOT PCG number PTOTal Total power in dBm PPICh Pilot power in dBm RHO RHO MACCuracy Composite EVM in PCDerror Peak code domain error in dB ACTive Number of a
380. ter a fixed step size for the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the cen ter frequency changes in steps of 1096 of the Center Frequency Stepsize This softkey is available for code domain and power vs time measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 270 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 272 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 6 2 3 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu in CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 4 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu on page 131 sisi er ae T TL 81 POO TERUEL EES 81 L Auto Scale Ones iria ct said sa de a ka d a d aad 81 EE 81 ERO d DII NEEDLE 82 SR BEE 82 Preamp or c tii 82 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 82 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 82 EEL Atte i OMO MR T 83 El Atten Mode Autos MAI EE 83 UE e Re 84 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc
381. tes a single channel over a single PCG You can select a specific channel and PCG with the Select softkey Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 50 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Bitstream Table e 1 Clrw Fig 6 14 Bitstream result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of dis playing use the marker to scroll inside the list Depending on the spreading factor symbol rate of the channel a power control group may contain a minimum of 12 and a maximum of 384 symbols In case of an active transmit diversity Antenna Diversity the values reduce to the half Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following bits e BPSK 1 bit only the I component is assigned e QPSK 2 bits I component followed by the Q component e 8PSK 3 bits e 16QAM 4 bits In accordance with the radio configuration and the channel type there are BPSK and QPSK modulated channels in the CDMA2000 system For details refer to chap ter 6 4 1 1 Relationship Between Channel and Modulation Type on page 154 In MS mode only BPSK modulated channels are used thus only the l component is assigned Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 51 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis AAA Rui s H J n
382. th esses 138 SWEEP TIME socias 140 145 Mideo bandwidih 2 dese acia 139 Crest Factor 4121 Cr E ctenacdeees 56 Cut off frequency C I 72 D default scalings of x and y axis ssssssssss 125 Delete Channel GL dee 69 Delete Channel Table EE 70 demodulation settings pc 70 EE 73 detector OVOEVIOW er dre enti aae Peri Idas duos 156 DiglConf SOfIKGy EE 96 Digital IQ data D IE 94 Digital IQ Info Remote Control uii ode a 301 A O 94 display configuration EE tee eege 77 display range veloces asia 122 123 124 132 133 Display range Ree EE 62 80 127 E eC2kSkldChannelConfigNewFSPB sess 67 Electronic input attenuation FSV B25 icc acest o HR a ER EN Y ER RU EXER 305 Enhanced Algorithm d 71 EVM vs Symbol d EX IQ BOX d Bee 96 desea rece UT 161 external noise source cooooococccncnccnooooncnonnccnoononocnnoninono 93 150 F FFT Filter Mode AUTO p 141 146 NATON E 141 146 Cel c me 141 146 filter types Mp SR 71 Filter types lle tn EMI 6dB m Normal SdB osas eiit eR 159 RRC Em 159 Filters ieu e 160 Selecting oo aw 199 Ke 159 frequency Offse
383. the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix n lt k gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example 1 4 window irrelevant AUTO MANUAL AUTO The limit line depends on the measured channel power MANUAL One of the three specified limit lines is set The selection is made with the chapter 7 2 3 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem on page 206 command RST AUTO CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive State This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure ment It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined Also either only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected Suffix n lt k gt irrelevant irrelevant CAL Culate Subsystem lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 118 See Add Remove on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt 1 to 4 RST 1 Example
384. the spectrum emission mask in the range from 4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier The exact measurement settings like the filter that is used depend on the Band Class parameter For a list of supported bandclasses refer to the Bandclass softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask menu Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm e Standard CDMA2000 Link direction Downlink Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and activate the CDMA2000 BTS Analysis option 3 Start the measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey 4 Setthe center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 878 49 MHz 5 Setthe reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 6 Select a bandclass a Press the Bandclass softkey and select BandClass 0 800 MHz Cellular Band from the list On the screen the spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation table shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 4 4 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and
385. tically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1dB Default unit dB SENSe Subsystem Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 93 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 92 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters Duration numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Manual operation See Meas Time Manual on page 92 SENSe ADJust CONFigure
386. time of 300 ms has elapsed The default value is 0 The setting is ignored if the Long Code Mask is set to 0 The chips offset is calculated as follows tSinceStartGPS 1 2288 MChips s where tSinceStartGPS is defined in seconds Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe OFFSet on page 246 Long Code Gen Mode Base SF Long Code MS mode Selects the mode of the long code generation Standard The cdma2000 standard long code generator is used ESG 101 The Agilent ESG option 101 long code is used in this case only sig nals from that generator can be analysed Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe MODE on page 247 Result Settings This softkey opens the Result Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Result Settings amp fx Common Settings Channel Code Number O 1 11 11 11 1 Code Order 0 Hadamard Bit Reverse Code Power Absolute 0 Relative Pilot Power 0 Absolute Relative Power Reference Pilot Total Time Phase Est On e off Normalize On e ott Code Domain Overview Settings Code Domain Overview On Close Power Control Group Result Settings In some measurements it is possible to highlight the data of a specific PCG Select the PCG on which to put the focus on in this field The range of the value depends on the Capture Length on page 64 defined in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Therefore
387. tion K83 pmo Mp MM M M e H ose Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base station mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FSV Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation RoHpE amp scHwaRz f TX signal Zee ees RF INPUT The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 d
388. tion errors for Code Domain Power measurements This measurement result is also valid if the R amp S FSV could not synchronize to the CDMA2000 signal Trigger to Frame Reflects the time offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first PCG In case of triggered data recording this corresponds to the timing offset frame trigger trigger offset start of first PCG If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSV to the CDMA2000 signal this measurement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed Active Channels Specifies the number of active channels found in the signal Detected data chan nels as well as special channels are regarded as active With transmit diversity the result applies to the selected Antenna Diversity on page 72 No value is dis played in both the Min and Max columns PCG Results Under PCG the measurement results that concern the total signal that is all chan nels for the selected PCG are displayed Total Power Shows the total power of the signal e Pilot Power Shows the power of the pilot channel If antenna 2 is selected the power of the F TDPICH is displayed in all other cases that of the F PICH For details on antenna selection refer to Antenna Diversity on page 72 e RHO Shows the quality parameter RHO According to the CDMA2000 standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally gen
389. trum RANGe range TRANSGdUcer essent n canina cnn nc nn carac 265 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARt cnn nc nan conan enne 259 SENSe ESPectrum RANGesrange FREQuency STOP d erinnerte reor ndun 260 SENSe ESPeetr m RRANge n c terrre teer rhe ie Y REY FERME PR ER EXER ENLA CER EYE ERE ak SENSE lc E SENSe FREQuency CEN WE AAA A AA Ai SENSe FREQuency CENTer STE ET SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO E SENSe FREQUuency CENTerSTEP LINK tn trt terrenos rn rect ree geret SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTOr SENSE FREQUENCY OR Elcano coin SENSe FREQ uehcy SPAN ccoo tette enter eee tre Ere a rne Fx Et E V epe Re dag SENSe FREQuSncy SPAN GEI DEE SENSE FREQUENC VS E SENSe FREQUORCY S TOP interrete depre ve ee tt t Pon e tp EERSTEN SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPails 2 rre rint eren hr rec ere a E ERR REX FEE Fa SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate channel essen 275 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel eene 274 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel enne tnnt er tnn nn nnne athens SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel sse SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel sse eene SENSe POWer ACHannel
390. uation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 305 EI Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value
391. uencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 305 EI Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the
392. um distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base station mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FSV Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation Em CS DODE DIE caca sa ite gt OLE O e OBB BOOS quc TX signal The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer e The R amp S FSV must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the CDMA2000 specific
393. units and accessories e An R amp S FSV equipped with the CDMA2000 MS Analysis option e R amp S SMU signal generator equipped with option SMU B9 B10 B11 baseband gen erator and SMUK46 CDMA2000 incl 1xEVDV e 1 coaxial cable 50 Q approximately 1 m N connector e 2 coaxial cables 50 Q approximately 1 m BNC connector e Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 24 e Measuring the Signal Channel POWOI ccrtc diee eee enis 26 e Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eese 27 e Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 28 e Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 30 Measuring tis Composite E VM aoi ere tar E tee ipe odas 31 e Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 33 5 1 Test Setup for Base Station or Mobile Station Tests This section describes the default settings of the R amp S FSV if itis used as a CDMA2000 base or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSV has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the Quick Start Guide Preparing For Use Furthermore the application firmware of the R amp S FSV K82 base station or K83 mobile station must be enabled Installation and enabling of the application firmware are described in the Quick Start Guide R amp S FSV K82 K83 Measurement Examples for the CDMA2000 MS Analysis op
394. up PCH paging channel PDCH packet data channel PDCCH packet data control channel PICH pilot channel 0 64 RC radio configuration definition of sampling rate permissible data rates modulation types and use of special channels and transmit diversity Set a group of 64 consecutive PCGs SF spreading factor SYNC synchronisation channel 32 64 TD transmit diversity two antennas used TDPICH transmit diversity pilot channel 16 128 X y Walsh code x y with code number x and spreading factor y of the channel 10 Appendix Hadamard and BitReverse Code Tables The following tables show the code sequences with Hadamard and BitReverse orders for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays As an example the corresponding cells for channel 8 32 channel number 8 for spreading factor 32 are marked to show where the different codes of this channel are located BITREVER SE D oO 0000 0 000 00 0 ooo D 1 naagaagnutijtzanauululu 100000 2 pooosofo 10000 o10000 3 D 0 O D i ij i 1 D og DO 0 110000 4 oo01 10 0 001 00 0 S DE NEG NN NN 0 0 1 6 Dua t n gu 1100 0 D T D DU U i 1 if 1i 1 100 D 111000 po 31ooofoooo 400 000100 001001 0 O 1 0 0 11 0 0 14 0 D 100100 001010 0 O 1 O 1 00 1 0 10 O0 010100 001014 0 0 1 O 1 11 10 10 O0 110100 001100 p O 1 140000 10 0 001100 0011014 0 0 1 1 0 11 0 1 10 0 101100 001110 0 O 1 1 1 00 1 1 10 0 011100 0011114 O O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 0 111100 010000 O 1 0 0 0 0
395. ured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 240 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 306 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula level mixer level RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the
396. urement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected PCG is displayed red MS mode the error is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 46 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis sap Rc nn A A A A A n A A P a Peak Code Domain Error e 1 Clrw Start PCG O Stop PCG 4 Fig 6 9 Peak Code Domain Error result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 66 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain See CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 182 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PCDerror see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 184 6 1 3 8 Channel Constellation This result display shows the channel conste
397. ut the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 11 In the example above PowerClass 39 43 xml under C r_s instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP see figure 6 17 these attributes are defined as follows e Standard W CDMA 3GPP e LinkDirection DL e PowerClass 39 43 dBm The PowerClass element It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about the power classes Up to four different power classes can be defined For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 110 and the corresponding parame ter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 12 The Range element This element is embedded in the PowerClass element It contains the settings infor mation of the range There have to be at least three defined ranges one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range The maximum num ber of ranges is 20 Note that the R amp S FSV uses the same ranges in each power class Therefore the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class An exception are the Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class Note also that there are two Limit nodes to be defined one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start
398. ve to Switch on the limit again This command is only for FSP compatibility and not necessary to use on the R amp S FSV Suffix n irrelevant Example CALC PSE Starts to determine the list CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation Manual operation See List Evaluation On Off on page 116 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin Margin This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters Margin 200 to 200 dB RST 200 dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB CALCulate Subsystem Manual operation See Margin on page 116 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continue
399. werf BTGlMCAbrer Fil TerbROrt enne 232 CONFigure CDPower BTSIMCARISEPIETer TYPE it iie EENS NN 233 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MAL Go 233 CONFloure CDbower BTGlMEAGurement entente nennen enne 234 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass lt Bandclass gt This command selects the bandclass for the measurement Parameters lt Bandclass gt CONFigure Subsystem 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 21 22 0 800 MHz band 1 1900 MHz PCS 2 TACS band 3 3A JTACS band see Bandclass on page 101 4 Korean PCS band 5 450 MHz NMT 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 7 700 MHz band 8 1800 MHz band 9 900 MHz band 10 Secondary 800 MHz band 11 400 MHz European PAMR band 12 800 MHz PAMR band 13 2 5 GHz IMT2000 Extension 14 US PCS 1 9GHz Band 15 AWS Band 16 US 2 5 GHz 17 US 2 5 GHz 21 3B JTACS band see Bandclass on page 101 22 3C JTACS band see Bandclass on page 101 RST 0 CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP BCL 1 Selects band class 1 1900 MHz Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Bandclass on page 101 See Bandclass on page 119 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command activates or deactivates the RECENT channel table To select another channel table use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect com mand Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB OFF Deactivates the RECENT channel
400. which the channel is transmitted 9 6 ksps to 307 2 ksps RC Radio configuration State Status display Unassigned codes are identified as inactive channels WEE Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 40 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Parameter Description Pwr dBm Pwr dB Specification of the absolute dBm and relative dB power of the channel Relative powers are either referred to the pilot channel or the total power of the signal T Offs ns and Ph Timing phase offset between this channel and the pilot channel enabled via the Offs mrad Demod Settings BTS mode on page 70 dialog box If enabled the maximum value of the timing phase offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Since the timing phase offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are com pared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTABle see CALCulate lt n gt H T T ED on page 182 6 1 3 3 Power vs PCG In this result display the power of the selected channel is averaged for each measured PCG and referred to the pilot power of the PCG Therefore the unit of the y axis is dB relative to the Pilot Channel The result display consists of the number of the PCGs
401. xt Peak remote control 194 195 196 211 212 213 214 Next Peak Mode Noise Correction Noise SQUECE comi Noise Src On Off remote control 310 OBW remote control Occupied Bandwidth A Peak remote control Ph Noise On Off remote control j Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control 192 193 PICH K83 POWGE d iaaa Power ModE tirsir siisii ree tree tre tont Power Mode remote control sas R amp S SUPPO tued ia Range e Range Lin Unit Range Lin Unit remote control Range Linear 96 iisisti ieiti Range Linear remote control Range Log remote control Range Log 1 dB rnnt Range Log 5 dB Range Log 10 dB erm Range Log 50 dB een Range Log 100 dB Range Log Manual RBWIVBW Mantlal rrt RBW VBW Noise 10 wh RBWIVBW Pulse 1 cc RBWIVBW Sine 1 3 isiin i iniiis Recall remote control e Ref Level remote control Ref Level Offset eerte Ref Level Offset remote control Ref Level Position siria Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Frequency remote control A Ref Point Level remote control Ref Point Time remote control Ref Value remote control Ref Value Position remote control Reference Positio
402. y a preceding asterisk Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 205 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative on page 204 Relative Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 205 CALC LIM ACP adjacent channel O0dBc O0dBc CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt STAT ON Absolute Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines an absolute limit Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 205 CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt ABS STAT ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 200 Check Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate the limit to be considered during a limit check The check of both limit values can be activated independently Chan Pwr Hz CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If deactivated the channel power is displayed in dBm If activated the channel power density is displayed instead Thus the absolute unit of the channel power is sw
403. yA BW 15 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW_20_0_MHz_CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 20 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 01 4 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 01 4 _MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_03_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_03_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 05 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm BW 05 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL Operating Manual 1176 7626 02 04 170 6 4 11 Further Information Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 15 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 20 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_05_0_MHz xm
404. ys the status Start The measurement is currently running Stop The measurement has been stopped or in single sweep mode the end of the sweep has been reached Remote command ABORt on page 310 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum on page 311 Restore Standard Files Spectrum Emission Mask Copies the XML files from the C NR SNinstrNsem backup folder to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore on page 257 Occupied Bandwidth Activates measurement of the bandwidth assigned to the signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 234 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 187 Power Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the percentage of total power in the displayed fre quency range which defines the occupied bandwidth Values from 10 to 99 9 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth on page 282 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements K82 Channel Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the test parameters for details see chapter 6 4 14 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 175 The default setting is 14 kHz For measurements in
405. z 1 75 System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E UL MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F UL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G UL WIMAX UL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz UL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz UL WLAN 802_11_TURBO ETSI xml IEEE 802 11 IEEE xml IEEE 802 11 R amp S FSV K82 K83 Instrument Functions of the CDMA2000 Analysis Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics WLAN 802 11a ETSI xml IEEE 802 11a IEEE xml IEEE 802 11a WLAN802 11b IEEE xml IEEE 802 11b WLAN 802 11j 10MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 11j WLAN 802 11j 20MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 11j EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm BW 01 4 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 03 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 03 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL Categor
406. ze for the center frequency to 50 96 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 271 0 5 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 96 of the resolution bandwidth Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 271 x Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 x RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage 96 of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 271 Cente

R&S FSV-K82/-K83 CDMA2000 Analysis

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSV-K82/-K83 CDMA2000 Analysis

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSV-K82/-K83 CDMA2000 Analysis